MODEL
MX-M550U
MX-M620U
MX-M700U
MX-M550N
MX-M620N
MX-M700N
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
OPERATION MANUAL
(for general information and copier operation)
Page
PART 1: GENERAL INFORMATION
• BEFORE USING
1-1
2-1
3-1
THE PRODUCT
•
MANAGING THE MACHINE
• PERIPHERAL DEVICES
PART 2: COPIER OPERATION
• MAKING COPIES
• CONVENIENT COPY
FUNCTIONS
4-1
5-1
6-1
•
MACHINE MAINTENANCE
(FOR COPYING)
• DOCUMENT FILING
7-1
8-1
FUNCTION
•
SPECIFICATIONS
Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to
gain the maximum benefit from the product.
Before installing this product, be sure to read the
installatio n requirement s and cautions sections.
Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference
including this manual, the "Operation manual (for general
information and copier operation)" and operation manuals
for any optional equipment which has been installed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trademark acknowledgments
The following trademarks and registered trademarks are used in conjunction with the machine and its peripheral devices and
accessories.
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
• Microsoft , Windows , Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server
®
2003 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other
countries.
• PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, and Safari are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc.
• Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.
• Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.
• PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
• IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
Candid and Taffy are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may
be registered in certain jurisdictions. CG Omega, CG Times, Garamond Antiqua, Garamond Halbfett, Garamond Kursiv,
Garamond and Halbfett Kursiv are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Albertus,
Arial, Coronet, Gill Sans, Joanna and Times New Roman are trademarks of The Monotype Corporation registered in the United
States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Avant Garde, ITC Bookman, Lubalin Graph,
Mona Lisa, Zapf Chancery and Zapf Dingbats are trademarks of International Typeface Corporation registered in the United
States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Clarendon, Eurostile, Helvetica, Optima,
Palatino, Stempel Garamond, Times and Univers are trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG, which may be registered
in certain jurisdictions, exclusively licensed through Linotype Library GmbH, a wholly owned subsidiary of Heidelberger
Druckmaschinen AG. Apple Chancery, Chicago, Geneva, Monaco and New York are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. and may
be registered in certain jurisdictions. HGGothicB, HGMinchoL, HGPGothicB and HGPMinchoL are trademarks of Ricoh
Company, Ltd. and may be registered in some jurisdictions. Wingdings is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries. Marigold and Oxford are trademarks of Arthur Baker and may be registered in some
jurisdictions. Antique Olive is a trademark of Marcel Olive and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Hoefler Text is a trademark
of Johnathan Hoefler and may be registered in some jurisdictions. ITC is a trademark of International Typeface Corporation
registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Agfa is a trademark
of the Agfa-Gevaert Group and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Intellifont, MicroType and UFST are trademarks of
Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
Macintosh and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and
other countries. PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated and may be registered in some jurisdictions. HP, PCL,
FontSmart and LaserJet are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company and may be registered in some jurisdictions. The Type 1
processor resident in Monotype Imaging's UFST product is under license from Electronics For Imaging, Inc. All other trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part 1: General Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
● Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the
manual, please contact your nearest authorised service representative.
● This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect
or other problem is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
● Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during use of the
product or its options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for
any damage that occurs due to use of the product.
Warranty
While every effort has been made to make this document as accurate and helpful as possible, SHARP Corporation makes
no warranty of any kind with regard to its content. All information included herein is subject to change without notice. SHARP
is not responsible for any loss or damages, direct or indirect, arising from or related to the use of this operation manual.
© Copyright SHARP Corporation 2007. All rights reserved. Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior
written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under copyright laws.
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine
due to product improvements and modifications.
OPERATION MANUALS
The following operation manuals are provided for the machine. Please read the appropriate manuals as needed for
the features you wish to learn about.
● Operation manual (for general information and copier operation) (this manual)
The first half of this manual provides general information about the machine, including safety information, loading
paper, removing misfeeds, and regular maintenance.
The second half of the manual explains how to use the copy and document filing functions.
● Administrator settings guide
The administrator settings are used by the administrator of the machine to configure functions to meet the needs
of your workplace.
This guide explains administrator settings for machine management, copying, and document filing. Administrator
settings for the fax, printer, network scanner and Internet fax functions are explained in the manuals for those
functions.
● Software setup guide
This manual mainly explains how to install and configure the software that allows the machine to be used as a
printer.
1
● Operation manual (for printer)*
This manual explains the procedures for using the machine as a printer.
1
● Operation manual (for image send)*
This manual explains the procedures for using the image send feature of the machine, including the network
scanner and Internet fax functions.
2
To use the network scanner function, the network function of the machine must be in a useable state* and the
network scanner expansion kit must be installed.
2
To use the Internet fax function, the network function of the machine must be in a useable state* and the network
scanner expansion kit and the Internet fax expansion kit must be installed.
1
* The Operation manual (for printer) and the Operation manual (for image send) are provided as PDF files in the
CD-ROM.
These manuals are not provided as printed manuals.
* On the MX-M550U/M620U/M700U, the network expansion kit is required.
2
0-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Improper installation may damage this product. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the
machine is moved.
1.The machine should be installed near an
accessible power outlet for easy connection.
2.Be sure to connect the power cord only to a
power outlet that meets the specified voltage and
current requirements. Also make certain the
outlet is properly grounded.
●For the power supply requirements, see the
name plate on the back of the main unit.
3.Do not install your machine in areas that are:
●damp, humid, or very dusty
●exposed to direct sunlight
●poorly ventilated
●subject to extreme temperature or humidity
changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater.
4.Be sure to allow the required space around the
machine for servicing and proper ventilation.
30cm
(11-13/16")
15cm
(6-1/8")
60cm
(23-5/8")
A small amount of ozone is produced within the printer during operation. The emission level is insufficient to cause
any health hazard.
NOTE:
3
The present recommended long term exposure limit for ozone is 0.1 ppm (0.2 mg/m ) calculated as an 8 hr. time-
weighted average concentration.
However, since the small amount that is emitted may have an objectionable odor, it is advisable to place the copier
in a ventilated area.
0-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTIONS
1.Do not touch the photoconductive drum. Scratches or smudges on the
drum will cause dirty prints.
2.The fusing unit is extremely hot. Exercise care in this area.
3.Do not look directly at the light source. Doing so may damage your
eyes.
Fusing unit
4.Four adjusters are provided on all optional stand/paper drawer units.
These adjusters should be lowered until they contact the floor.
When moving the machine with the optional stand/paper drawer, be
sure to raise the adjusters. Also, unlock the two casters at the front of
the optional stand/paper drawer. After moving the machine, lower the
four adjusters until they reach the floor and lock the two casters.
5.Do not make any modifications to this machine. Doing so may result in
personal injury or damage to the machine.
Adjuster
6.Since this machine is heavy, it is recommended that it be moved by
more than one person to prevent injury.
7.When connecting this machine to a computer, be sure to first turn both
the computer and the machine off.
Lock
Release
8.Do not make copies of anything which is prohibited from copying by law.
The following items are normally prohibited from printing by national
law. Other items may be prohibited by local law.
●
●
●
●
Money
Stamps
Bonds
Stocks
●
●
●
●
Bank drafts Checks
Passports
Driver's licences
Caution:
This connector (A) is only intended for service purposes.
Any connection to this terminal may cause malfunctions of the machine.
Instruction for service technician:
The cable length for the service terminal has to be less than 3m (118").
(A)
The machine includes the document filing function, which stores document image data on the machine's hard disk.
Stored documents can be called up and printed or transmitted as needed. If a hard disk failure occurs, it will no
longer be possible to call up the stored document data. To prevent the loss of important documents in the unlikely
event of a hard disk failure, keep the originals of important documents or store the original data elsewhere.
With the exception of instances provided for by law, Sharp Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages
or loss due to the loss of stored document data.
"BATTERY DISPOSAL"
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE DISPOSED
OF PROPERLY. PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SHARP DEALER OR AUTHORIZED SERVICE
REPRESENTATIVE FOR ASSISTANCE IN DISPOSING OF THIS BATTERY.
This product utilizes tin-lead solder, and a fluorescent lamp containing a small amount of mercury.
Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations.
For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance:
www.eia.org
0-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTIONS
Laser Information
Wave length
+10 nm
-15 nm
785 nm
Pulse times
North America:
Europe:
Max 0.8 mW
55 cpm / 62 cpm model: (3.1 µs 3.1 ns)/7 mm
70 cpm model: (2.7 µs 2.7 ns)/7 mm
55 cpm / 62 cpm model: (3.7 µs 3.7 ns)/7 mm
70 cpm model: (3.2 µs 3.2 ns)/7 mm
Output power
At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.8 MILLIWATT PLUS 10 % and is maintained
constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control (APC).
Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
For North America:
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This Digital Equipment is rated Class 1 and complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the CDRH standards. This
means that the equipment does not produce hazardous laser radiation. For your safety, observe the precautions below.
● Do not remove the cabinet, operation panel or any other covers.
● The equipment's exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches. Do not bypass any safety interlock by
inserting wedges or other items into switch slots.
For Europe:
CAUTION
VAROITUS!
LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN
MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ
KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA
MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA
ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN
TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1
YLITTÄVÄLLE
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION
WHEN OPEN INTERLOCKS
DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE
TO BEAM.
VORSICHT
UNSICHTBARE
LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN
ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG
ÜBERBRÜCKT. NICHT DEM
STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE
LASERSÄTEILYLLE.
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT
VARNING
OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ
ANNAT SÄTT ÄN I DENNA
BRUKSANVISNING
ADVARSEL
USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING
VED ÅBNING, NÅR
SPECIFICERATS, KAN
SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER
UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ
UDSAETTELSE FOR
ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTAS FÖR
OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING,
SOM ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN
FÖR LASERKLASS 1.
STRÅLNING.
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
CAUTION
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERERÜCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
VORSICHT
USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING, NÅR SIKKERHEDSAFBRYDERE ER
UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR STRÅLNING.
ADVARSEL
ADVERSEL
USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES OG SIKKERHEDSLÅS BRYTES.
UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.
LASER KLASSE 1
OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRRAR ÄR
URKOPPLADE. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.
VARNING
Laserstrahl
AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTÖNTÄ
LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
VARO!
0-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
0-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 1
BEFORE USING THE
PRODUCT
This chapter contains basic information that should be read before using
the product.
Page
INTRODUCTION..................................................................................... 1-2
MAIN FEATURES ................................................................................... 1-3
●
Exterior............................................................................................ 1-10
●
Interior............................................................................................. 1-11
●
●
Touch panel..................................................................................... 1-14
AUDITING MODE ................................................................................... 1-18
●
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing a SHARP digital multifunction copier.
Please read this manual before using the machine. In particular, be sure to read "INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS"
before using the machine.
Please keep this manual close at hand for reference whenever necessary.
This manual provides general information on using the machine, such as routine maintenance and how to load paper
and remove misfeeds. It also explains how to use the copier and document filing functions.
Separate manuals have been provided for the fax function, printer function, and network scanner function.
■ Original and paper sizes
This machine allows use of standard sizes in both the AB and inch systems.
These are shown in the tables below.
Sizes in the AB system
Sizes in the inch system
11" x 17" (LEDGER)
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
8-1/2" x 14" (LEGAL)
8-1/2" x 13" (FOOLSCAP)
8-1/2" x 11" (LETTER)
7-1/4" x 10-1/2" (EXECUTIVE)
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (INVOICE)
■ The meaning of "R" in original and paper size indications
Some original and paper sizes can be placed in either the portrait or landscape orientations. To differentiate
between landscape and portrait, the landscape orientation size indication will contain an "R". These are indicated
as A4R, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, etc. Sizes that can be placed only in the landscape orientation (A3,
B4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13") do not contain the "R" in their size indication.
Landscape
orientation
Size indication
without "R"
Size indication
with "R"
Portrait orientation
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAIN FEATURES
The digital multifunction copier is capable of performing a variety of functions. This page shows features related to
the copy function.
● Sort mode
● Group mode
● 2-sided Copy
● Exposure Adjustments
● Reduction/Enlargement
See page 1-3
See page 1-3
See page 1-3
● Job programs
● Mirror Image
● B/W Reverse
● Date print
See page 1-6
See page 1-6
See page 1-6
See page 1-6
See page 1-3
See page 1-4
● Stamp
● Page numbering
● Interrupting a copy run
(When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)
(When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)
(When the Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)
(When the Punch Module is installed.)
(When the Inserter is installed.)
See page 1-7
1
● XY Zoom
● Margin Shift
● Erase
● Dual Page Copy
● Pamphlet Copy
● Job Build
● Tandem Copy
(When using the MX-M550U, MX-M620U, or
MX-M700U, the network expansion kit is required.)
● Covers/inserts
See page 1-4
See page 1-4
See page 1-4
See page 1-7
See page 1-7
See page 1-4
See page 1-4
See page 1-5
See page 1-5
See page 1-5
See page 1-5
See page 1-5
See page 1-5
See page 1-6
See page 1-6
● Transparency Insert
● Multi Shot
● Book Copy
● Tab Copy
● Card Shot
● Document filing function
See page 1-8
Sort
See page 4-9
2-sided Copy
Copies can be collated.
Copy onto both sides of the paper using the document
glass or the automatic document feeder.
Copy
Original
Original
Copy
Group
See page 4-9
Exposure Adjustments
See page 4-14
Copies can be grouped by page.
The desired image type for the original can be
selected.
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Original
Copy
Resolution
Exposure
ABCDE
ABCDE
Lighter
Darker
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAIN FEATURES
Reduction / Enlargement
See page 4-15
Erase
See page 5-4
Copies can be enlarged or reduced to the desired
size.
Shadows that appear around the edges of copies of
books or thick originals can be erased.
Original
Copy
Original
Copy
Edge erase
Centre erase
Enlargement
Reduction
Edge+Centre
erase
XY Zoom
See page 4-18
Dual Page Copy
See page 5-5
Separate ratio settings can be selected for the
length and width of a copy.
The left and right pages of a book can be
successively copied onto separate sheets.
Original
Copy
Book original
Copy
Margin Shift
Margins can be added to copies.
See page 5-3
Pamphlet Copy
See page 5-6
One-sided or two-sided pamphlet style copies can
be made.
One-sided copying Image shifted Image shifted
Original
to the right
to the left
Originals (one-sided)
Finished copies are
folded in two.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Left binding
Margin
Two-sided copying
Original
Margin
First page
First page
Originals (two-sided)
2
4
6
8
Image shifted
to the right
Image shifted
to the left
Right binding
1
3
5
7
Or
Margin
Margin
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAIN FEATURES
See page 5-23
Job Build
See page 5-8
Transparency Insert
When you have a very large number of originals, the
pages can be scanned in sets.
Inserts can be automatically inserted between
transparencies.
Originals (1-sided)
Copy
1
Originals (2-sided)
Insert sheets
300 sheets
150 sheets 150 sheets
Tandem Copy
See page 5-10
Multi Shot
See page 5-24
Two machines can be used to run a large copy job
in parallel.
Multiple original pages can be copied onto a
single sheet of paper in a uniform layout.
Originals
(1-sided)
Originals
(2-sided)
Copy
100 sets of
copies
50 sets of
copies
50 sets of
copies
*When using the MX-M550U, MX-M620U, or
MX-M700U, the network expansion kit is required.
Covers/inserts
See page 5-12
Book Copy
See page 5-26
Front covers, back covers, and inserts can be
added. These can also be copied on.
Books and other bound originals can be copied
pamphlet style.
Original
Copy
Originals
Left binding
Back cover
First page
First page
First page
First page
Front cover
Insert sheets
Right binding
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAIN FEATURES
Tab Copy
See page 5-27
Mirror Image
See page 5-31
Copying is possible on the tabs of tabbed paper.
A mirror image copy can be made.
Original
Tab paper
Copy
Original
Copy
Tab width
A4 : Maximum of 20mm (51/64")
8-1/2" x 11" : Maximum of 17mm (5/8")
Card Shot
See page 5-29
B/W Reverse
See page 5-31
The front and back of a card can be copied onto
one sheet of paper.
White and black can be inverted on a copy to
produce a negative image.
This function is convenient for making copies for
certification purposes and helps save paper.
Original
Copy
Original
Copy
CARD
CARD
Front of
card
CARD
Back of
card
Example:
Portrait
A4 (8-1/2") size
Example:
Landscape
A4 (8-1/2") size
Date
See page 5-35
Job programs
See page 5-44
The date can be added to copies.
Various steps of a copy operation can be stored
as a program, and up to 10 programs can be
stored. Saving frequently used sets of settings in a
program saves you the trouble of selecting those
settings each time you wish to use them.
JOB PROGRAMS
2010/APR/4
PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER.
RECALL
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAIN FEATURES
See page 5-46
Stamp
See page 5-36
Interrupting a copy run
Reverse text can be added to copies ("stamp").
A copy job in progress can be interrupted for a
rush job.
INTERRUPT
AUTO
ORIGINAL
1
AUTO
EXPOSUR
CONFIDENTIAL
A4
Offset mode
See page 3-4
Page numbering
See page 5-37
Each set of output can be offset slightly from other
sets for easy separation.
Page numbers can be added to copies.
Offset mode
Non-Offset mode
*When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is
installed.
Staple sort mode
See page 3-4
Text
See page 5-41
Sets of copies can be automatically stapled.
Entered text can be added to copies.
Original
Copy
Meeting
*When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is
installed.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAIN FEATURES
Saddle stitch
See page 3-5
Document filing function
See chap. 7
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, copies
can be automatically folded in half and stapled at
the fold. (Use with the pamphlet function (see
A document image can be stored on the hard disk.
A stored file can easily be called up and printed or
transmitted.
Saddle stitch binding
Printed
Document
Image
HDD
Transmitted
Save to
machine's
hard disk
Call up a
saved file to
reuse
6
7
*When the Saddle stitch finisher is installed.
Hole punching
See page 3-5
Copies can be punched to add holes.
Original
Punch positions
*When the Punch module is installed.
Inserter mode
See page 3-14
Blank or already printed-on sheets of paper can
be added as a cover or an insert without being
printed on. The inserter can be used to feed heavy
sheets of paper that cannot be fed from other
trays.
Copy
Original
*When the Inserter is installed.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAIN FEATURES
Energy saving features
This product has the following two power reducing modes that conform to the
Energy Star guidelines to help conserve natural resources and reduce
environmental pollution.
Preheat mode
The preheat mode is the first level of power reduction. The power is reduced
to the fuser unit a preset time after the machine has completed a job and no
further machine operations have been performed. The machine can recover
to the ready condition within a short period of time. The preset time to enter
the mode can be set by a administrator settings.
Products that have earned
the ENERGY STAR are
designed to protect the
environment through
superior energy efficiency.
®
1
Auto power shut-off mode
The auto power shut-off mode is the second level of power reduction. In this mode power is shut off to the
fusing unit and the touch panel. In this state more energy is saved than in the preheat mode but the time to
recover to the ready condition will be longer. The preset time to enter this mode can be set by a administrator
settings.
When this product is used as a printer, and either of the above modes is active, the mode will be deactivated
automatically by an incoming job and the machine will automatically warm up and start to print when it has
reached the ready temperature.
When this product is configured for multi-function operation, and either of the above modes is active, the mode
will be deactivated as above by an incoming print job. Either mode will also be deactivated by operation of
DOCUMENT FILING, IMAGE SEND or COPY mode key.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Exterior
(AR-F15)
*1
1
9
Saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16) /
*1
Turns the power on and off.
If the power does not come on when the power
switch is turned on, check the main power switch to
see if it is turned on.
*1
2
3
4
*1
*1
10
11
12
Tray 5 (Large capacity tray(AR-LC6))
(See page 2-7)
Automatic document feeder (See page 4-2)
*1
Tray 5 (Large capacity tray(AR-LC7))
This automatically feeds and scans multiple sheet
originals. Both sides of two-sided originals can be
scanned at once.
(See page 2-8)
Tray 1-Tray 2
The trays hold paper. Approximately 800 sheets of
standard A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper (80 g/m
5
Front cover
2
Open to replace toner cartridge.
(20 lbs.)) can be loaded in tray 1, and
approximately 1200 sheets of standard A4 or
6
7
Operation panel
2
8-1/2" x 11" size paper (80 g/m (20 lbs.)) can be
loaded in tray 2.
Centre tray (See page 4-9)
13
14
Tray 3
Finished sheets are deposited here
Tray 3 holds paper. Approximately 500 sheets of
2
standard (80 g/m (20 lbs.)) paper can be loaded
8
Bypass tray
in this tray. Tabbed paper and transparencies can
also be loaded.
Special papers (including transparency film) and
copy paper can be fed from the bypass tray.
Tray 4
Tray 4 holds paper. Approximately 500 sheets of
2
standard (80 g/m (20 lbs.)) paper can be loaded
in this tray.
1
2
3
10
11
*1
,
,
,
and
are peripheral devices. For information on these devices, see the explanations of the
devices in the manual.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Interior
1
15
20
21
Duplex unit
Right side cover
Open this cover to remove a misfeed from the
fusing unit area.
Open when a misfeed has occurred in the bypass
tray or large capacity tray.
Upper cover of large capacity tray
16
Fusing unit
Open when a misfeed has occurred in the large
capacity tray.
Toner images are fused here.
CAUTION
22
23
Left side cover release
The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing misfed
paper.
Push this knob up to open the left side cover.
Left cover of paper drawer
17
Cover of the duplex unit
Open this cover to remove paper misfed in tray 3 or
tray 4.
Open when a misfeed has occurred in duplex unit.
*2
18
19
Toner cartridge
24
Photoconductive drum
This holds toner for printing. The toner cartridge
must be replaced when indicated on the operation
panel.
Images are formed on the photoconductive drum.
NOTE
Do not touch or damage the photoconductive drum.
Keep this switch turned on when the fax option or
Internet fax option is installed.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
■ Other optional equipment
●Network expansion kit (MX-NBX1)
●Network scanner expansion kit (MX-NSX1)
This kit is required to add the network scanning
feature.
To add the network scanner function to the
MX-M550U, MX-M620U, or MX-M700U, the
network expansion kit is required.
This kit is required to add on the network function.
When this expansion kit is installed, the machine
can be used as a network printer.
●Barcode font kit (AR-PF1)
This kit adds bar code fonts to the machine.
●Internet fax expansion kit (MX-FWX1)
This kit is required to use the Internet fax function.
To add the Internet fax function, the network
scanner expansion kit is required.
● Data security kit (MX-FRX5)
This kit is used to erase electronic data from the
hard disk and memory immediately after a
document is printed or transmitted.
●Application integration module (MX-AMX1)
The application integration module can be
combined with the network scanner function to
append a metadata file to a scanned image file.
●PS3 expansion kit (MX-PKX1)
This kit provides compatibility of PostScript level 3
to the printer.
●Facsimile expansion kit (AR-FX8)
This kit is required to add fax function.
●
Application communication module (MX-AMX2)
This allows the machine to be linked over a network
to an external software application.
●Additional fax memory (8 MB) (AR-MM9)
●External account module (MX-AMX3)
This is required to use an external account
application on the machine.
●256MB expansion memory board (AR-SM5)
This extends the memory of the machine.
Peripheral devices are basically optional, but are incorporated in some models as standard equipment.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Operation panel
PRINT
READY
DATA
DOCUMENT
FILING
1
LINE
DATA
IMAGE SEND
COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
LOGOUT
1
5
Touch panel
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
The machine status, messages and touch keys are
displayed on the panel. The document filing, copy,
network scanner* , and fax* , Internet fax*
functions are used by switching to the screen for
the desired function. See the following page.
This is used to store, edit, and delete user names
and folder names for the document filing function,
and to configure the administrator settings and
1
2
3
6
7
Numeric keys
2
Mode select keys and indicators
Use to enter numeric values for various settings.
Use to change modes and the corresponding
display on the touch panel.
[ ] key ([LOGOUT] key)
This key is used in copy mode, document filing
[DOCUMENT FILING] key
1
2
mode, network scanner mode* , fax mode* , and
Press to select the document filing mode. (See
3
Internet fax mode* .
8
9
[IMAGE SEND] key/LINE indicator/DATA
indicator
Press to change the display to network scanner
[#/P] key
This is used as a program key when using the copy
function, and to dial when using the fax function* .
2
1
2
3
mode* , fax mode* or Internet fax mode* . (See
the "Operation manual (for image send)") and
"Operation manual (for facsimile)".)
[C] key (Clear key)
This key is used in copy mode, document filing
mode, network scanner mode* , fax mode* , and
Internet fax mode* .
1
2
[COPY] key
Press to select the copy mode.
3
10
11
[START] key
3
PRINT mode indicators
READY indicator
Use this key to start copying in copy mode, scan a
document in network scanner mode* , or scan a
document for transmission in fax mode* or
Internet fax mode* .
1
Print data can be received when this indicator is
lit.
2
3
DATA indicator
[CA] key (Clear all key)
Lights up or blinks when print data is being
received. Also lights up or blinks when printing is
being performed.
This key is used in copy mode, document filing
mode, network scanner mode* , fax mode* , and
Internet fax mode
and perform an operation from the initial machine
state.
1
2
3
*
. Use the key to cancel settings
4
[JOB STATUS] key
Press to display the current job status. (See page
*1 When the network scanner option is installed.
*2 When the fax option is installed.
*3 When the Internet fax option is installed.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Touch panel
The touch panel screens shown in this manual are
printed images, and may appear different from the
actual screens.
■ Selecting a function
[Example 1]
If a key is highlighted in a
OCK ONTO
0
setting screen at the
time the screen appears,
the [OK] key can be
pressed to store the
selection without further
operation.
OK
OK
■ Using the touch panel
[Example 1]
CANCEL
PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS
YES NO
PAPER
FROM IN
Items on the touch panel
are easily selectable by
touching the key
associated with the item
with a finger. Selection
of an item will be
JOB QUEUE
COPY
SETS / PROG
003 / 000
001
003 / 000
010 / 000
[Example 2]
066621122
A function in the special
Beep
tone
accompanied with
a
functions
screen
is
DUAL PAGE
COPY
beep tone* to confirm
the item was selected.
selected by touching the
key so that it is
highlighted. To cancel
the selection, touch the
highlighted key once
again.
Also, the key area for the item will be highlighted
for visual confirmation.
TANDEM
COPY
* If a greyed out key is touched, a double beep will
sound.
Copier feature
[Example 2]
Keys which are greyed
out on any screen are
not selectable.
● Dual page copy
● Job build
● Tandem copy
● Mirror image
● B/W Reverse
1/13
COMPLETE
[Example 3]
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.
A
corresponding icon
The confirmation beeps can be disabled using
"Keys touch sound" in the administrator settings.
(See page 10 of the administrator settings guide.)
representing the feature
will appear on the touch
key and on the main
screen of the mode
selected. If this icon is
touched, the setting
screen of the function (or
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
ORIGI
4
2.
B5
FILE
B4
A3
QUICK FILE
a
menu screen) will
appear, allowing the settings to be checked or
adjusted and the function to be cancelled easily.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
■ Job status screen (common to print, scan, fax and Internet fax)
This screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed.
This screen can be used to display the "JOB QUEUE" (showing stored jobs and the current job) or the
"COMPLETE" job list (showing finished jobs). This screen is used to check jobs, move a job to the top of the JOB
QUEUE, or delete a job.
*1
"COMPLETE"
job screen
"JOB QUEUE" screen
1
JOB QUEUE
COMPLETE
JOB QUEUE
COMPLETE
JOB QUEUE
COPY
SETS / PROGRESS
020 / 001
STATUS
1/1
COPYING
PAPER EMPTY
COPY
020 / 000
020 / 000
002 / 000
DETAIL
PRIORITY
DETAIL
Suzuki
066211221
WAITING
WAITING
STOP/DELETE
CALL
INTERNET-FAX
INTERNET-FAX
FAX JOB
SCAN TO
PRINT JOB
1
Job list
*1 "PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display
When a job status display indicates "PAPER
EMPTY", the specified paper size for the job is not
loaded in any of the trays.
The displayed jobs in the job list are themselves
operation keys. To cancel printing or to give a job
the highest print priority, touch the relevant job key
to select the job and execute the desired operation
In this case, the job will be suspended until the
required paper is loaded. Other stored jobs will be
printed (if possible) until the required paper is loaded.
(Other jobs will not be printed if the paper runs out
during printing.) If you need to change the paper size
because the specified paper size is not available,
8
9
using the keys described in
and
.
This shows the current job and the jobs waiting to
be run. The icons to the left of the jobs in the
queue show the job mode. The document filing
reprint job icon is highlighted.
Note that the icon does not become highlighted
during retransmission of a fax/image transmission
job.
touch the current job key to select it and then touch
10
the [DETAIL] key described in
.
2
Mode select key
Print mode
Copy mode
This switches the job list display between "JOB
QUEUE" and "COMPLETE".
SCAN mode
"JOB QUEUE": Shows stored jobs and the job in
progress.
Scan to e-mail job
Scan to FTP job
"COMPLETE": Shows finished jobs.
Scan to Desktop job
Files saved using the "FILE" and "QUICK FILE"
functions and finished broadcast transmission
jobs appear as keys in the finished job screen.
The "FILE" or "QUICK FILE" job keys in the
finished job screen can be touched, followed by
the [CALL] key, to call up a finished job and print
or transmit it. A finished broadcast transmission
job key can be touched followed by the [DETAIL]
key to check the result of the transmission.
Scan to Network folder job
Fax mode
Fax send job
Fax reception job
PC-Fax send job
Internet Fax mode
i-Fax send job
i-Fax reception job
PC-Internet Fax send job
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
3
9
[PRINT JOB] key
[PRIORITY] key
This displays the print job list of print mode
(copying, printing, fax reception, Internet fax
reception, and self printing).
A stored job in the "JOB QUEUE" job list can be
printed ahead of all other stored jobs by selecting
the job and then touching this key.
4
10
[SCAN TO] key
[DETAIL] key
This displays the transmission status and finished
jobs of scan mode (Scan to e-mail, Scan to FTP,
Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder)
when the network scanner option is installed.
This shows detailed information on the selected
job. Files saved using the "FILE" and "QUICK
FILE"
functions
and
finished
broadcast
transmission jobs appear as keys in the finished
job screen. A Quick File in the finished job screen
or the [Filing] key can be touched, followed by the
[CALL] key, to call up a finished job and print or
transmit it. A finished broadcast transmission job
key can be touched followed by the [DETAIL] key to
check the result of the transmission.
5
[FAX JOB] key
This displays the transmission/reception status
and finished jobs of fax mode (fax and PC-Fax)
when the fax option is installed.
6
Display switching keys
Use to switch the page of the displayed job list.
11
7
[CALL] key
[INTERNET-FAX] key
When this key is touched after selecting a job in
the COMPLETE job status screen (a job stored
using the FILE or QUICK FILE keys of the
document filing function), the "JOB SETTINGS"
menu screen appears to let you resend or reprint
the finished job. (See "Document filing function"
This displays the transmission/reception status
and finished jobs of Internet fax mode and PC
Internet fax mode when the Internet fax option is
installed.
8
[STOP/DELETE] key
Use to cancel or delete the current job or delete
the selected reserved job. Note that printing of
received faxes and received Internet faxes cannot
be cancelled or deleted.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF
The machine has two power switches. The main power switch can be found at the upper right after the front cover
is opened. The power switch is located at the upper left of the right side of the machine.
The two switches are normally used as follows:
CAUTION
Before turning off the main power switch, make sure
that the communication and data lights are not
blinking on the operation panel. Turning off the main
power switch or unplugging the power cord while the
lights are blinking may damage the hard disk and
cause the data being stored or received to be lost.
"ON" position
"OFF" position
1
Main power switch ON, Power switch OFF
Main power switch
Power switch
Set the switches in this way at night or at other times
when the machine is not being used. The touch
panel cannot be used, however, the following
functions will remain operational:
Main power switch: Normally kept in the ON position.
(Be sure to keep ON when using the
fax function.)
Power switch :
Turn to ON position before using
the machine.
When the fax option is installed:
Automatic fax reception, timer transmission
(automatic transmission at a specified time), and
transmission when a polling request is received from
another machine (remote transmission, relay
broadcast transmission)
Turn OFF at night when the
machine is not used.
Main power switch ON, Power switch ON
The copy, printer, fax*, Internet fax*, network
scanner*, and document filing functions can be
used. If the machine is not used for a certain interval
after turning on the power switch, the machine will
automatically enter a reduced power consumption
state (preheat mode or auto power shut-off mode
When the Internet fax option is installed:
Automatic Internet fax reception
* The required options must be installed to use
these functions.
Main power switch OFF, Power switch OFF
Main power switch OFF, Power switch ON
The copy, printer, fax, Internet fax, network scanner,
and document filing functions cannot be used.
Turn both switches off and unplug the power cord if
you suspect a machine failure, if there is a bad
thunderstorm nearby, or when you are moving the
machine.
The copy, printer, fax, Internet fax, network scanner,
and document filing functions cannot be used.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDITING MODE
Auditing mode can be enabled to keep track of the number of pages printed and transmitted (scanned) by each
account (up to 500 accounts can be established). The page counts can be viewed and totaled as needed.
<This mode is enabled in the administrator settings separately for the copy, printer, fax, Internet fax, network scanner,
and document filing functions (page 7 of the administrator settings guide)>
Using the machine when the auditing mode is enabled
The procedure for making copies when auditing mode has been enabled for the copy function is explained below.
NOTES
● When auditing mode is enabled for document filing and fax/image transmission, a message will appear asking
you to enter your account number each time you switch to the main screen of one of those functions in the touch
panel. Enter your account number in the same way as for copy mode, and then begin the scanning procedure.
● When the account counter is turned on for the printer function, you must enter your account number in the setting
screen of the printer driver on your computer in order to print.
When the account counter is turned on, the right
ENTER YOUR ACCOUNT NUMBER.
message appears on the touch panel.
When the above screen appears, enter your 5-digit account number and then begin the copying procedure.
Enter your account number (5 digits) with
the numeric keys.
Follow the appropriate steps to perform
the copy job.
1
2
As you enter your
account number, the
hyphens (-) change to
asterisks ( ). If you
enter an incorrect digit,
When copying is begun, the following message
will appear.
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.
press the
re-enter the correct digit.
key and
PRESS [LOGOUT] WHEN FINISHED.
LOGOUT
When a correct account number is entered, the
following message will appear.
touch the [INTERRUPT] key and then enter your
account number as explained in step 1. The
following message will appear.
ACCOUNT STATUS :MADE
COPIES
/REMAINING
:00,123,000/00,012,456
COPY INTERRUPT MODE.
OK
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.
If a limit has been set in the administrator settings
for the number of copies that can be made by the
account, the remaining number that can be made
is displayed.
When the copy job is finished, press the
[ ] key ([LOGOUT] key)
3
Check the number in the display and touch the
[OK] key.
NOTE
If "ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY" is enabled in the
administrator settings and an incorrect account
number is entered three times in a row, "PLEASE SEE
YOUR ADMINISTRATOR FOR ASSISTANCE." will
appear (page 8 of the administrator settings guide).
Operation is not possible while this message
appears (about one minute).
LOGOUT
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 2
MANAGING THE MACHINE
This chapter explains how to load paper, replace the toner cartridge, and
remove paper misfeeds. It also contains information about supplies.
Page
LOADING PAPER ................................................................................... 2-2
●
●
●
Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 - tray 2 ............................. 2-3
●
Loading paper in paper tray 3 ......................................................... 2-5
●
Changing the paper size in paper tray 3 ......................................... 2-5
●
●
●
Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray AR-LC7)... 2-8
●
●
used in the trays)............................................................................. 2-12
●
●
Setting the paper size when a special size is loaded...................... 2-17
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
If the paper runs out during printing, a message will appear in the display.
Follow the procedure below to load paper.
Identifying the trays
The trays are identified using numbers as shown below.
1
Tray 1
This is the left large capacity tray.
2
3
4
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 2
This is the right large capacity tray.
5
6
Tray 5
This is an optional large capacity tray.
Bypass tray
NOTES
● Do not use curled or folded paper. Doing so may cause a misfeed.
● Do not place heavy objects or press hard on any tray which is pulled out.
● Do not place objects on the large-capacity tray. This may damage the tray or interfere with operation.
● Load paper with the print side face up. However, when the paper type is set to "PRE-PRINTED" or "LETTER
HEAD", load the paper face down*.
* If the two-sided function is disabled using "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the administrator settings (page 11
of the administrator settings guide), load the paper face up.
Loading paper in paper tray 1 - tray 2
A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper can be loaded in tray 1. A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper can be loaded in tray 2. These
are parallel large-capacity trays that allow a total of approximately 2000 sheets of SHARP standard paper (80 g/m2
(20 lbs.)) to be loaded. If you wish to change the paper size of tray 1 or tray 2, see "Changing the paper size in paper
tray 1 - tray 2" on the next page.
1 Pull out paper tray 1-tray 2.
2 Load paper in the left and right trays.
Lift the paper guide and
Gently pull the tray out
until it stops.
Indicator line
load paper in tray 1.*1
Approximately 800 sheets
of SHARP standard paper
(80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) can be
loaded.
Be sure to return the
paper guide to its
original position after
loading the paper.
Load paper in tray 2.*1
Indicator line
Approximately
1200
SHARP
sheets
of
standard paper (80 g/m2
(20 lbs.)) can be loaded.
*1 The paper stack must not be higher than the indicator line.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
3 Gently push tray 1-tray 2 into the machine. 4 Set the paper type.
If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an
inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, or if the
paper type was changed, be sure to change the
appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the
Push the tray firmly all
the way into the
machine.
Loading paper in paper tray 1/tray 2 is now
complete.
5
2
Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 - tray 2
To change the paper size of tray 1 - tray 2, follow the steps below.
This section only explains how to change the paper size. For the procedures for opening/closing the tray and loading
To have the paper size of tray 1 changed to B5, or to have the paper size of tray 1 changed from B5 to another size,
consult your dealer or nearest authorised service representative. (Only a service technician can change the paper
size in this case.)
Adjust the paper size guide to the paper
size to be used.
1 Remove the paper size guide.
2
Tray 1
Tray 2
(A)
(B)
LT
A4
A4
LT
Paper sizes are inscribed at the slot (A) on the
bottom of the tray and at the hole (B) at the top of
the paper size guide. ("LT" indicates 8-1/2" x 11"
size.)
Align the bottom of the paper size guide with the
slot, and align the hole at the top with the locking
tab.
Hook
Paper guide
With the base of the tray pressed all the way down,
hold down the hook at the bottom on the paper
size guide and pull the paper size guide up slightly.
NOTES
NOTES
● Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press
down on the tray.
● Before changing the paper size of tray 1, raise the
paper guide.
● When attaching the paper size guide, make sure
that the top and bottom of the guide are aligned to
the same paper size.
● If the top and bottom of the paper size guide are not
aligned to the same paper size, skewed feeding
and misfeeds will result.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
Push in the paper guide so that it locks
into place.
3
5 Set the paper type and paper size.
For the procedure for configuring these settings,
2-14).
An incorrect paper type or paper size setting may
cause automatic selection of the wrong type or
size of paper, and result in a misfeed or otherwise
prevent printing.
Push the paper size guide in until the hook at the
bottom locks into place. (You will hear a "click"
when the hook locks.) Move the paper size guide
slightly to verify that it has locked into place.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to adjust the far paper
guide to the paper size to be used.
4
Be sure to adjust the far paper guide to the same
size as the near paper guide.
NOTES
● When removing and attaching the far paper size
guide, take care not to hit the front cover of the
machine.
● Adjust both the front and back guides. If only one
guide is adjusted, skewed feeding and misfeeds
may result.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
Loading paper in paper tray 3
Approximately 500 sheets of standard paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) from A3 to A5R size (11" x 17" to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)
can be loaded in tray 3. Special papers such as tabbed paper and transparency film can also be loaded. For
information on what special papers can be used, see "Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that
can be used in the trays)" on page 2-12. To load tabbed paper or transparency film, see "Loading tabbed paper" or
"Loading transparency film" on the next page.
1 Pull out paper tray 3.
3 Gently push tray 3 into the machine.
Gently pull the tray out
until it stops.
Push the tray firmly all
the way into the
machine.
2
4 Set the paper type.
2 Load paper into the tray.
If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an
inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, or if the
paper type was changed, be sure to change the
appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the
The paper stack must not
be higher than the
indicator line (no more
than 500 sheets of
SHARP standard paper
(80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)).
Loading paper in paper tray 3 is now
complete.
To change the paper
size, see "Changing the paper size in paper tray 3"
below.
5
Changing the paper size in paper tray 3
1 Pull out paper tray 3.
4 Gently push tray 3 into the machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.
If paper remains in the tray, remove it.
Set the paper type of the paper that was
loaded in tray 3.
Adjust the guide plates A and B by
5
6
2
squeezing their lock levers and sliding
them to the paper size to be loaded.
The guide plates A and
Be sure to change the appropriate settings as
If you changed the paper size, be sure to change
the paper size setting. An incorrect paper size
setting will cause the wrong paper to be
automatically selected and may prevent printing or
cause misfeeds.
B are slidable. Adjust
them to the paper size to
be
loaded
while
squeezing their lock
levers.
3 Load paper into the tray.
Changing the paper size in paper tray 3 is
now complete.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
■ Loading tabbed paper
When using tabbed paper, follow the steps below to attach the special guide to the divider plate at the bottom
edge of the tabbed paper. (Tabbed paper cannot be used in tray 4.)
1 Take out the tabbed paper guide.
3 Place the tabbed paper in the tray.
Place the tabbed paper
The guide is stored
inside the left side of the
machine as shown.
with the print side face
up.
Be sure to replace the
guide when you have
finished using it.
2 Pull out the tray and attach the guide.
[Example]
Make sure that the positions of the tabs correspond
with the originals as shown below.
Slide the divider plate to
the position of the
bottom edge of the
tabbed paper and attach
the guide so that it
covers the divider plate.
Original
Tabbed paper
Front side
1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page
1st page
2nd page
3rd page
4th page
Gently push the tray in and set the paper
type to tabbed paper.
4
page 2-14)
■ Loading transparency film
Be sure to load transparency film with the label facing down and the film oriented vertically. Smudging and a
dirty image may result if the film is loaded with the label facing up. (Transparency film cannot be used in tray 4.)
Changing the paper size in paper tray 4
Plain paper from A3 to B5 size (11" x 17" to 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R) can be loaded in tray 4. For paper that can be used,
see "Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that can be used in the trays)" on page 2-12.
The procedures for loading paper in tray 4 and changing the paper size are the same as for tray 3 (see page 2-5).
NOTE
When referring to the explanations of tray 3, keep in mind that special papers such as tabbed paper and
transparency film cannot be used in tray 4. Use tray 3 for special paper.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray
AR-LC6)
The large capacity tray can hold up to 3,500 sheets of A4 size (8-1/2" x 11") SHARP standard paper (80 g/m2
(20 lbs.)). If you wish to change the paper size, please consult your dealer (the paper size must be changed by a
service technician).
Push the tray firmly all the way into the
machine.
1 Pull the tray out until it stops.
3
When the tray is in
The paper table will
automatically rise to the
paper feed position.
operation, do not use
excessive force to pull
the tray out. This may
damage the tray.
2
Place the paper in the centre of the paper
table.
2
The paper stack must
not be higher than the
indicator line (up to
3,500 sheets of SHARP
standard paper (80 g/m2
(20 lbs.))
If the paper type was
changed, be sure to change the appropriate
settings as explained in "Setting the paper type
■ Specifications
Name
Large capacity tray (AR-LC6)
Paper size
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
Paper weight
Paper capacity (plain)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs.)
3500 sheets (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.))
376 mm (W) x 546 mm (D) x 518 mm (H)
(14-23/32" (W) x 21-1/2" (D) x 20-13/32" (H))
Dimensions
Power supply
Weight
Supplied from the main unit
Approximately 28.5 kg (62.9 lbs.)
Overall dimensions when
attached to machine
1347 mm (W) x 679 mm (D)
(53-3/64" (W) x 26-47/64" (D))
Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray
AR-LC7)
An optional large capacity tray (AR-LC7) is available for the machine. The AR-LC7 can hold up to 3000 sheets of
80 g/m2 (20 lbs.) paper. (See the following "Specifications" for the types of paper that can be used in the large
capacity tray.)
When installed, the AR-LC7 operates as "Tray 5". The AR-LC7 cannot be used together with the AR-LC6 described
on page 2-7.
■ Part names
Operation button /
Indicator
To load paper in the tray,
press this button, wait until
the indicator turns off, and
then pull the tray out.
● Load paper in the tray with the print side face up.
Top cover
Open this cover to
remove a misfeed.
However, if the paper type is "PRE-PRINTED" or
"LETTER HEAD", load the paper with the print side
face down*.
* If the two-sided function is disabled using
"DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the administrator
settings (page 11 of the administrator settings
guide), load the paper face up.
■ Specifications
Name
Large capacity tray (AR-LC7)
Paper sizes*
A3 (11" x 17"), B4 (8-1/2" x 14"),
A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)
Paper weight 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to
28 lbs.)
Paper size display
One tray 3000 sheets (80 g/m2 or
20 lbs.)
NOTES
Number
paper
/Paper capacity
Power supply
Dimensions
of
trays
● If you wish to change the paper size, please consult
your dealer (the paper size must be changed by a
service technician).
● Do not use curled or folded paper. This may cause
misfeeds.
● When the tray has been pulled out, do not place
heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.
● Do not place any objects on the large capacity tray
or use it instead of a chair or step. This may
damage the tray and interfere with the use of the
bypass tray.
Supplied from the machine
690mm (W) x 587mm (D) x 521.5mm
(H) (27-5/32" (W) x 23-7/64" (D) x
20-17/32" (H))
Weight
Approx. 50 kg (Approx. 110 lbs.)
* The indicated sizes of plain paper can be used.
When using the AR-LC7, refer also to "More
Specifications are subject to change for improvement
without notice.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
■ Loading paper in the AR-LC7
If the paper runs out during printing, a message will appear in the display. Follow the procedure below to load
paper.
1 Pull the tray out until it stops.
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to insert your
hands into holes on paper table.
Pull the finger grip up
and pull the tray out
until it stops.
Do not insert your
hands here.
2
NOTE
To add or change paper, press the operation button.
When the button is
pressed, the indicator
will blink until the paper
NOTES
Do not insert objects in
the tray or attempt to
place spare paper in
the tray. This may
damage the tray.
table stops descending.
Do not pull the tray out
until the indicator turns
off. Attempting to pull
the tray out when the indicator is blinking or solidly lit
may damage the tray.
Special paper cannot be used.
2 Place the paper on the paper table.
The paper stack must
not be higher than the
indicator line.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the
machine.
3
When the paper tray is
pulled out, the paper
After the tray is pushed
in, the indicator will
blink until the paper
Indicator
line
table
descended
position
will
have
a
to
where
table
finishes
approximately 500 sheets of A4 size (8-1/2" x 11")
80 g/m2 (20 lbs.) paper can be placed. After the
paper is placed, the paper table will descend to a
position where an additional approximately 500
sheets can be placed. When the paper table has
descended all the way, approximately 3000 sheets
can be held.
ascending and then
light solidly.
If a different type of paper is loaded that was used
previously, the paper settings for tray 5 must be
changed on the machine. Be sure to change to the
appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
Loading paper in the bypass tray
The bypass tray can be used to print on plain paper, postcards, label sheets, tabbed paper, and other special papers.
When using SHARP standard paper, up to 100 sheets can be loaded (up to 20 postcards) for continuous printing
similar to the other trays. For the paper types that can be used in the bypass tray, see "Specifications of paper trays
NOTE
After loading the paper in the bypass tray, be sure to set the paper type and size (step 4) if these were changed.
Set the type and size of the paper loaded in
the bypass tray.
1 Open the bypass tray.
4
If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an
inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, or if the
paper type was changed, be sure to change the
appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the
This completes the procedure for loading
paper in the bypass tray.
5
When loading A3, B4,
A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x
14", 8-1/2" x 13" or
8-1/2" x 11"R size paper,
be sure to pull the
auxiliary tray all the way
out. If the auxiliary tray is
■
Loading tabbed paper in the bypass
tray
[Example]
Make sure that the positions of the tabs correspond
with the originals as shown below.
not pulled all the way out, the size of the loaded
paper will not be correctly displayed.
Original
Tabbed paper
Set the bypass tray guides to the width of
the copy paper.
2
3
Front side
1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page
1st page
2nd page
3rd page
4th page
Place the tabbed paper face up.
Insert the copy paper all the way into the
bypass tray. (Do not force the paper in.)
Place the copy paper
Front
face up. If the bypass
tray guides are set wider
than the copy paper, the
inside of the machine
may become soiled,
resulting in smudges on
succeeding copies. A gap may cause skewing
or wrinkling.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
■ Important points when using the
bypass tray
● Be sure to load A5 paper, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" paper,
and postcards as shown (1) horizontal loading in
the diagram below.
(1)
(2)
2
(1):Horizontal loading
(2):Vertical loading
● When loading plain paper other than SHARP
standard paper, special media other than
postcards, SHARP-recommended transparency
film, or paper to be printed on the back, the
paper must be loaded one sheet at a time.
Loading more than one sheet at a time will cause
misfeeds.
● Before loading heavy paper, straighten any
curling in the paper.
● When adding paper, remove any paper
remaining in the tray, combine it with the paper to
be added, and reload as a single stack.
● Do not use paper that has already been printed
on by a plain paper fax machine or a laser
printer. This may cause printed images to
become dirty.
● When printing on transparency film, be sure to
remove each sheet as it exits the machine.
Allowing sheets to stack in the output tray may
cause curling.
● Use only Sharp-recommended transparency
film. Transparency film should be loaded in the
bypass tray with the label facing down and the
film oriented vertically. Smudging and a dirty
image may result if the film is placed with the
label facing up.
Label facing down
● When loading multiple sheets of transparency
film in the bypass tray, be sure to fan the sheets
several times before loading.
● Use only tabbed sheets that are made of paper.
Tabbed sheets made of film or other material
cannot be used.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that
can be used in the trays)
The specifications for the types and sizes of paper that can be loaded in the paper trays are shown below.
Tray No.
(tray name)
Tray 1
Applicable paper types
Applicable paper sizes
Paper weight
Plain paper (Refer to the next page
60 to 105 g/m2
(16 to 28 lbs.)
A4, 8-1/2" x 11"
Tray 2
A4, 8-1/2" x 11"
2-14), the following paper sizes can be
automatically detected:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2" x 13"
Plain paper
60 to 128 g/m2
(16 to 34 lbs.)
following paper sizes can be automatically detected:
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2"
x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R
• Non-standard sizes
2-14), the following paper sizes can be
automatically detected:
A4, A4R, B5, B5R (only A4 for tabbed paper)
following paper sizes can be automatically detected:
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R (only 8-1/2" x 11" for
tabbed paper)
Tray 3
Special paper
(Refer to the
next page "More
• Heavy paper
• Transparency
See the remarks
for special papers
on the following
page.
information on film
that can be
used".)
• Labels
• Tabbed paper
• Non-standard sizes smaller than A4 or
8-1/2" x 11"
• 40 sheets of transparency film can be loaded
• Tabbed paper can be used
2-14), the following paper sizes can be
automatically detected:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 13"
• When "AUTO-INCH" is selected in "Setting
2-14), the following paper sizes can be
automatically detected:
Plain paper (Refer to the next
60 to 128 g/m2
(16 to 34 lbs.)
Tray 4
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x
11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R
• Non-standard sizes
Same as tray 3. Postcards can also be used.
However,
• Up to 100 sheets of plain paper can be loaded.
• Up to 20 sheets of transparency film can be loaded.
• Up to 20 postcards can be loaded.
The same paper as
tray 3, and also 52
Bypass tray
to 59 g
/m2 (14 lbs.
to 15 lbs.) thin
paper can be used.
Tray 5
(AR-LC6)
Same as tray 2.
Tray 5
Plain paper (Refer to the next page A3, B4, A4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 60 to 105 g/m2
(AR-LC7)
(16 to 28 lbs.)
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
■ More information on plain paper
Incorrect feeding may result in poor toner fusing (the toner does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed
off), skewed feeding, misfeeds, or other failures.
Paper in AB system
A5 to A3
Paper in inch system
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17"
SHARP standard paper
64 g/m2 (17 lbs.)
Plain
paper
Restrictions on paper
other
than
SHARP
60 to 105 g/m2 or 16 to 28 lbs.
standard paper
Recycled, coloured, pre-punched, pre-printed and letterhead papers must conform to the same conditions
as above.
2
■ More information on special media that can be used
Incorrect feeding may result in poor toner fusing (the toner does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed
off), skewed feeding, misfeeds, or other failures.
Type
Remarks
• For A5 to A4 or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 8-1/2" x 11" sizes, heavy paper ranging
from 106 to 128 g/m2 or 16 to 34 lbs. can be used.
• Other heavy papers
Heavy paper
176 g/m2 (65 lbs.) can be used.
200 to 205 g/m2 (110 lbs.) can be used but only for A4, 8-1/2" x 11" paper
in the portrait orientation.
Special
paper
• For A5 or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" paper, the orientation must be landscape.
• Use SHARP recommended paper.
• Use only tabbed sheets that are made of paper. (Tabbed sheets made of
film or other material cannot be used.)
Transparency film,
Tabbed paper
Postcards
• Japanese official postcards can be used.
■ Paper that can be used for automatic two-sided printing
Paper used for automatic two-sided printing (paper that can be fed through the duplex module) must meet the
following conditions:
Paper type :Plain paper as specified on page above.
Paper size :Must be one of the following standard sizes: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R or A5R (11" x 17",
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)
Paper weight :64 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lbs.)(special heavy papers indicated in the table above)
NOTES
● Special papers (explained above) cannot be used for automatic two-sided printing. However, certain special
heavy papers (index paper, cover paper) can be used.
● Various types of plain paper and special paper are sold. Some of these cannot be used in the machine. Please
consult your retailer or your dealer when buying paper.
● The image quality and toner fusibility of special papers may change due to ambient conditions, operating
conditions, and paper characteristics, resulting in image quality inferior to that of SHARP standard paper.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
Setting the paper type and paper size
Follow these steps to change the paper type setting when the paper type has been changed in a paper tray. For the
1 Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
5 Touch the [TYPE / SIZE] key.
The system setting
PER TRAY SETTINGS
TYPE / SIZE
PY
SYSTEM
menu
screen
will
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
TRAY 3
PLAIN / A4
appear.
DOC.
FILING
COPY
FAX
PRINT
Select the type of paper that was loaded in
the tray.
Example: The paper type of tray 3 is selected
2 Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.
6
The paper tray selection
screen will appear.
PAPER TRAY
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
RINT
CANCEL
TRAY 3 TYPE/SIZE SETTING
SELECT THE PAPER TYPE.
1/2
ATA
ORWARD
PRINTER
CONDITION
TAB PAPER
LETTER HEAD
HEAVY PAPER
LABELS
PLAIN
PRE-PRINTED
RECYCLED
PRE-PUNCHED
COLOUR
TRANSPARENCY
1/2
Touch the desired paper type to select it. The
paper size setting screen will appear.
3 Touch the [TRAY SETTINGS] key.
PAPER TRAY SETTINGS
NOTES
● Tabbed paper can only be used in tray 3, bypass
tray and the inserter.
TRAY SETTINGS
● Heavy paper, label sheets, and transparency film
cannot be loaded in trays 1, 2, 4, and 5.
Select the size of paper that was loaded in
the tray.
Touch the appropriate keys (checkboxes).
7
Display the setting screen of the desired
paper tray.
4
SYSTEM SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
TYPE
OK
TRAY3 TYPE/SIZE SETTING
OK
FIXED PAPER SIDE
PAPER TRAY SETTINGS
TYPE / SIZE
PLAIN / A4
SIZE
TYPE
1/8
1
/
1
/
11X17,82X14,82X11
TRAY 1
PLAIN
AUTO-INCH
AUTO-AB
1
1
1
1
1
/
/
/
/
/
8
2X11R,74X102,52X8
2
R
DISABLE DUPLEX
DISABLE STAPLE
DISABLE PUNCH
A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5
B5R,216X330(82X13)
1
DOC.
FILING
/
I-FAX
COPY
PRINT
FAX
NON STANDARD
SIZE
SIZE INPUT
X420 Y297
2/2
[AUTO-INCH] key : Select when you have
loaded an inch-based size
of paper.
Touch the
setting screen of the desired paper tray.
key or
key to display the
NOTE
[AUTO-AB] key
: Select when you have
loaded an AB size of paper.
To automatically switch to a tray with the same size
and type of paper (if there is one) in the event that the
paper tray runs out of paper, display the last screen
with the
SWITCHING].
[SIZE INPUT] key : Select to directly enter a
paper size (see page 2-17).
key and select [AUTO TRAY
[NON STANDARD SIZE] checkbox :
Select when you have
loaded a non-standard size
of paper (see page 2-17).
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
SYSTEM SETTINGS
NOTE
CANCEL
2/2
TRAY 3 TYPE/SIZE SETTING
SELECT THE PAPER TYPE
Sizes that can be selected vary depending on the
selected paper type.
USER TYPE 1
USER TYPE 5
USER TYPE 2
USER TYPE 6
USER TYPE 3
USER TYPE 7
USER TYPE 4
Touch the [OK] key in the size setting
screen.
8
1/2
You will return to the tray setting screen of step 4.
Configure paper settings for each tray and
then touch the [OK] key to exit.
10
Select output functions that can be used
with the selected tray.
9
NOTE
Touch the checkboxes
under the desired items
to select them.
DOC.
FILING
The size and type of paper loaded in the bypass tray
can also be set from the paper setting screen. Touch
the [PAPER SELECT] key in the main screen to
display the paper selection screen, and then touch
the [PAPER SELECT] key of the bypass tray and go
to step 5.
2
I-FAX
FAX
PRINT
COPY
NOTE
When the inserter (option) is selected, printing of
faxes and Internet faxes is not possible.
■ User type
Select a "User type" when the name of the paper
type does not appear in the selections or when you
wish to select the tray attributes yourself.
Touch the
key in step 5 on the previous page
to display the user type selection screen and then
select a user type.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
■ Programming and editing paper types
To program or edit the name of a paper type or set paper attributes, follow the steps below.
Touch the [PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION]
key.
1
4 Set the paper attributes.
Touch the checkboxes to the left of the items to
select them.
OK
CANCEL
EXIT
PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION
No.01
PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION
TYPE NAME
USER TYPE 1
DISABLE DUPLEX
DISABLE PUNCH
FIXED PAPER SIDE
ISABLE STAPLE
Select the paper type that you wish to
program or edit.
2
FIXED PAPER SIDE:
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Select this checkbox when paper is to be loaded
print side down in the tray. Make sure a checkmark
does not appear when paper is to be loaded print
side up.
• If the two-sided function is disabled using
"DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the administrator
settings (page 11 of the administrator settings
guide), load the paper face up.
PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION
SELECT THE PAPER TYPE TO EDIT.
USER TYPE 1
USER TYPE 2
USER
USER
R TYPE 5
USER TYPE 6
DISABLE DUPLEX:
Prohibits two-sided printing. Enable when the
backside of the paper cannot be printed on.
3 Touch the [TYPE NAME] key.
A character entry screen appears. Enter up to 14
for entering characters.
DISABLE STAPLE:
Prohibits stapling. Enable when using special
papers such as transparency film and label
sheets.
CANCEL
EXIT
PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION
No.01
DISABLE PUNCH:
Prohibits punching. Enable when using special
papers such as transparency film and label
sheets.
TYPE NAME
USER TYPE 1
DISABLE DUPLEX
DISABLE PUNCH
D PAPER SIDE
DISABLE STAPLE
NOTES
● Tray attributes depend on the selected paper.
● "FIXED PAPER SIDE" and "DISABLE DUPLEX"
cannot be simultaneously enabled.
Touch the [EXIT] key to exit the
programming/editing procedure.
5
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING PAPER
Setting the paper size when a special size is loaded
NOTE
Special sizes of paper cannot be loaded in trays 1, 2, 4 and 5.
Trays 3 and the bypass tray
Inserter (option)
Perform steps 1 through 5 of "Setting the
Perform steps 1 through 5 of "Setting the
1
1
Touch the [SIZE INPUT] key and then
2
2 Touch the [SIZE SELECT] key.
touch the [AB] tab.
OK
2
The
size
selection
The size entry palette
Y
1
1
2
/
/
2
11X
17,8
X
14,8
X
AUTO-INCH
1
1
1
/
/
/
2
4
X10 ,5
2
screen appears.
8
X
11R,7
appears.
(148 432)
mm
X
Y
420
297
A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B
B5R
AUTO-AB
(100 297)
mm
SIZE SELECT
INCH
AB
3 Select the desired paper size.
Touch the
key or the
key to enter
3
SYSTEM SETTINGS
the X (width) and Y (length) dimensions of
the paper.
INSERTER TYPE/SIZE SETTING
OK
TYPE
TYPE
SIZE
1/2
X
X
(width) is initially
1
1
/
PLAIN
/
11X17
8
2X14
8
2X11
OK
Y
selected. To enter Y
(length), touch the [Y]
key and then enter the
length.
1
1
/
1
1
1
/
/
/
/
82X11R
5
2X82R
74X102
(148 432)
mm
300
100
X
Y
(100 29
mm
There are separate screens for inch-based paper
selection and AB paper selection. Touch the
INCH
AB
key or the
key to switch between the screens.
4 Touch the [OK] key.
4 Touch the [OK] key.
X
You will return to the size
setting screen of step 2.
You will return to the size
setting screen of step 2.
OK
Y
TYPE
OK
(148 432)
mm
300
100
X
Y
SIZE
2
(100 297)
mm
1
/
1
/
8
2X14
8
2X11
INCH
AB
1
1
1
1
/
2
/
/
/
5
2X82R
4X10
Perform steps 8 through 10 of "Setting the
paper type and paper size" (pages 2-15).
If the paper is a non-standard size, select
the [NON STANDARD SIZE] checkbox.
5
5
1
1
/
2
X11
/
11
X
X
17,8
2
X
14,8
1
1
1
1
1
/
/
/
/
/
8
2
11R,7
4
X
102,5
2
X
8
2
R
A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5
1
/
B5R,216x330(82x13)
NON STANDARD
SIZE
X300 Y100
Perform steps 8 through 10 of "Setting the
paper type and paper size" (pages 2-15).
6
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
The system settings can be used as needed to meet the needs of your workplace. The items that can be set with the
system settings are shown below.
● Total count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .The number of pages processed by the machine and optional equipment
● Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Used to configure the screen contrast, date and time, and keyboard
1
● List print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to print lists of settings and fonts. (See page 2-20)
● Paper tray settings . . . . . . . . . . . .The paper type, paper size and automatic tray switching can be set for each
tray. Automatic tray switching allows feeding to switch between trays loaded
with the same type and size of paper. If one tray runs out of paper during
For the detailed descriptions and use of the settings listed below, see the fax, image send, and printer
manuals.
1
● Address control* . . . . . . . . . . . . .Used to store information for various functions.
2
● Sender control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Used to store the sender's information that appears on your Scan to E-mail
transmissions at the destination.
● Fax data receive/forward* . . . . . .Faxes received to memory and received Internet faxes can be forwarded to
1
another destination.
● Printer condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Used to configure default settings for the printer function (see the Operation
manual (for printer)).
2
●
Document filing control* . . . . . . . . . Used to configure default settings for the document filing function. (pages 7-25
● Administrator settings . . . . . . . . .These are items that are used by the administrator of the machine to
configure machine settings. A key appears for these settings in the system
settings menu screen. For information on these settings, see the
administrator settings guide.
*
1 These settings can be configured in a system where the facsimile, network scanner and Internet fax function is
available.
*
2 These settings can be configured in a system where the network scanner function is available.
General procedure for system settings
Touch the [CLOCK] key and then the following
screen appears.
1 Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
The system setting
SYSTEM SETTINGS
PY
CLOCK ADJUST
OK
menu
screen
will
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
appear.
YEAR
2010
MONTH
04
DAY
04
HOUR
11
MINUTE
30
DATE FORMAT
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING
Touch the key of the desired item to
display its setting screen.
The example of selecting the [DEFAULT SETTINGS]
key and then the [CLOCK] key is explained below.
Touch the year, month, day, hour or minute
2
4
key, and then use the
or
key to
adjust the setting.
●If you select a non-existent date (for example,
Feb. 30), the [OK] key will grey out to prevent
entry of the date.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
EXIT
DEFAULT
SETTINGS
PAPER TRAY
SETTINGS
LIST PRINT
TOTAL COUNT
PRINTER
CONDITION
●Select [DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING]
checkbox to have the time automatically
change at the beginning and end of daylight
saving time.
FAX DATA
RECEIVE/FORWARD
SENDER CONTROL
ADDRESS CONTROL
DOCUMENT FILING
CONTROL
ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS
The system settings are described in detail on the
following pages.
3 Touch the [CLOCK] key.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
5 Touch the [DATE FORMAT] key.
More information on setting procedures
In the following type of screen, a setting is selected
by touching the key so that a checkmark (
appears. The settings below are configured to
allow use of tray 1 in print, copy, and fax modes. To
The following screen appears.
)
SYSTEM SETTINGS
DATE FORMAT
OK
2010/04/04/SUN 11:30
DAY-NAME
display the next screen, touch the
or
keys.
YYYY/MM/DD
POSITION
FIRST
12-HOUR
24-HOUR
MM/DD/YYYY
SYSTEM SETTINGS
PAPER TRAY SETTINGS
TYPE / SIZE
DD/MM/YYYY
LAST
OK
FIXED PAPER SIDE
DISABLE DUPLEX
DISABLE STAPLE
DISABLE PUNCH
1/8
TRAY1
PLAIN / A4
If you wish to change the format of the date
and time, touch the desired format keys.
DOC.
FILING
I-FAX
PRINT
COPY
FAX
6
2
Touched keys are highlighted.
The selected format is applied to lists printed out in
"LIST PRINT".
7 Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the
date and time setting
screen.
OK
AME
ON
T
12-HOUR
8 Touch the [OK] key.
9 To exit the settings, touch the [EXIT] key.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
EXIT
DEFAULT
SETTINGS
PAPER TRAY
SETTINGS
LIST PRINT
TOTAL COUNT
FAX DATA
RECEIVE/FORWARD
PRINTER
CONDITION
ADDRESS CONTROL
SENDER CONTROL
DOCUMENT FILING
CONTROL
ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
About the settings
■ Total count
■ List print
This displays the following sheet counts (the
counts that can be displayed vary depending on
the options installed):
This is used to print lists of machine settings and a
test page to check resident fonts.
The following lists and pages are available:
1
Number of pages output by the machine.
●All custom setting list
2
Number of original pages transmitted by the
machine.
Number of times the automatic document feeder
Shows the hardware status, software status,
printer configuration settings, tray settings, and
counts.
3
●Printer test page
was used to feed original pages and number of
times the stapler was used (if installed).
Number of pages stored by document filing.
Shows the PCL symbol set list, fonts, network
interface (NIC interface) settings, and settings
used for the NIC card.
4
1
In the case of
only,
●Sending address list
One touch destination list, group list, program
list, and memory box list.
●A3 (11" x 17") size paper is counted as two
sheets.
●Each sheet of paper used for automatic two-
sided copying is counted as two sheets (A3
(11" x 17") paper is counted as four sheets).
●Paper with an entered size of 384 mm (15-1/8")
or larger is counted as two sheets (four sheets
during automatic two-sided copying).
●Document filing user / folder list
Shows the user names and folder names for
document filing.
●Sender control list
Shows the senders that have been stored.
■ Default settings
NOTE
The following settings can be configured:
A test page cannot be printed if "PROHIBIT TEST
PAGE PRINTING" (See the "Operation manual (for
printer)".) has been set to "prohibited" in the
administrator settings.
●Display contrast
Screen contrast adjustment is used to make the
LCD touch panel easier to view under various
lighting conditions. Touch the [LIGHTER] key to
make the screen lighter, or the [DARKER] key to
make the screen darker.
■ Paper tray settings
The paper type, paper size, enabled modes and
automatic tray switching can be set for each tray.
and paper size. Automatic switching to another
paper tray is used to automatically switch to
another tray with the same size and type of paper in
the event that the paper runs out during continuous
printing. This requires that the trays be loaded with
the same size of paper. The paper tray settings can
be enabled or disabled for each tray, and for printer
mode, copy mode, fax mode, Internet fax mode,
and document filing mode. To enable any function,
●Clock
Use this to set the date and time in the
machine's built-in clock. This clock is used by
functions that require date and time information.
●Keyboard select
The layout of the keyboard that appears in letter
entry screens can be changed.
Select the arrangement of the letter keys that
you find easiest to use.
The
following
three
alphabet
keyboard
configurations are available:
touch the check box key so that a checkmark
appears.
(
)
● Keyboard 1 (QWERT... configuration)*
● Keyboard 2 (AZERTY...configuration)
● Keyboard 3 (ABCDEF...configuration)
* The default setting is "Keyboard 1".
(Example: Character entry screen when
Keyboard 3 is selected)
ABC abc
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES
When toner runs low, a message will appear to inform you that the toner cartridge must be replaced.
NOTE
To view the approximate amount of toner remaining, hold down the [COPY] key during printing or when the
machine is on standby. The percentage of toner remaining will appear in the display while you hold down the key.
When the percentage falls to "20-0%" , obtain a new toner cartridge and keep it ready for replacement.
Follow the steps below to replace the toner cartridge.
1 Open the front cover.
Shake
the
toner
cartridge horizontally.
Do not rotate it as shown
at left.
2
4 Insert the new toner cartridge.
Align the toner cartridge
with the insert hole and
push it in as shown.
Do not rotate the
cartridge.
2 Remove the toner cartridge gently.
Push the cartridge in until it locks securely
in place.
5
Hold the toner cartridge
with both hands as
shown in the illustration,
and pull it out of the
machine.
Remove the new toner cartridge from the
box and shake it five or six times
horizontally.
6 Close the front cover.
3
NOTE
Shake
cartridge
the
well
toner
to
ensure that the toner
flows well and will not
stick to the inside of
the cartridge.
CAUTION
● Do not throw the toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.
● Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.
NOTE
Place the used toner cartridge in the plastic bag and store it. When placing the toner cartridge in the bag, insert
it horizontally, not vertically. If the cartridge is stood on end, the collected used toner may spill out and soil the floor
or your clothes.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STORAGE OF SUPPLIES
Standard supplies for this product that can replaced by the user include paper, toner cartridges, and staple cartridges
for the finisher.
For best copying results, be sure to use only Sharp Genuine Supplies which are designed,
engineered, and tested to maximize the life and performance of Sharp products. Look for
the Genuine Supplies label on the toner package.
GENUINE SUPPLIES
■ Proper storage
1. Store the supplies in a location that is:
● clean and dry,
● at a stable temperature,
● not exposed to direct sunlight.
2. Store paper in the wrapper and lying flat.
3. Paper stored in packages standing up or out of
the wrapper may curl or become damp, resulting
in paper misfeeds.
4. Store a new toner cartridge box horizontally. Do
not store it standing on end. If stored standing on
end, the toner may not distribute well even after
shaking the cartridge vigorously, and will remain
inside the cartridge without flowing out.
Supply and Consumables
The supply of spare parts for a repair of the appliance is guaranteed for at least 7 years following the termination
of production. Spare parts are those parts of the apparatus which may break down within the scope of the ordinary
use of the product - whereas those parts which normally exceed the life of the product are not to be considered
as spare parts. Consumables too, are available for 7 years following the termination of production.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MISFEED REMOVAL
When a misfeed has occurred during printing, the message "A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED". will appear in the touch
panel display of the operation panel and printing including copying and facsimile output will stop. The approximate
misfeed locations are indicated with " " shown in the illustration below. The page numbers for detailed information
on misfeed removal are also shown.
1
Misfeed in the transport area, fusing
area, and exit area (See page 2-24)
2
Misfeed in the automatic document
3
When feeding paper from tray 2, the
bypass tray, or tray 5, this mark may
blink. When the mark blinks, check the
following diagrams:
2
●
Fourth diagram in step 3 on page 2-26
Diagram in step 6 on page 2-27
●
●
4
5
6
Misfeed in the saddle stitch finisher
7
8
9
10
Misfeed in tray 1 - tray 2
11
NOTE
Printing is not possible when a misfeed occurs, and thus any faxes or Internet faxes received at this time will be
temporarily held in memory. The faxes will print out automatically as soon as the misfeed is cleared.
NOTES
CAUTION
The fusing unit is hot. Take
care in removing paper.
● Do not damage or touch the photoconductive
● Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during
removal.
● lf paper is accidentally torn during removal, be
sure to remove all pieces.
Fusing unit
Misfeed removal guidance
Misfeed removal guidance can be displayed by touching the [INFORMATION] key on the touch panel after a misfeed
has occurred.
INFORMATION
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MISFEED REMOVAL
Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and exit area
Misfed in the fusing area
o
CAUTION
Turn roller rotating knob
The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper.
(Do not touch the metal parts.)
B in the direction of the
arrow to remove the
misfed paper.
1 Remove the duplex unit.
Roller rotating knob B
Grasp the finger hold
and gently open the unit.
CAUTION
The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper.
(Do not touch any metal parts.)
If the misfed paper is
inside the fusing area,
turn down the fusing unit
open tab to open the
fusing unit and remove
Remove the misfed paper as shown in the
illustrations below.
Misfed in the transport area
Turn roller rotating knob
A in the direction of the
arrow to remove the
misfed paper.
2
the misfed paper.
Fusing unit open tab
Roller rotating knob A
NOTES
Do not touch or
damage the transfer
roller.
Misfed in the exit area
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
Transfer roller
Do not touch or
damage
the
photoconductive
drum.
After clearing the
misfeed, promptly
3 Gently close the duplex unit.
After closing, confirm
Photoconductive drum
that
the
misfeed
close the duplex unit.
Leaving the unit
message has been
cleared and the normal
display appears.
open may adversely affect the photo-sensitive drum
and cause poor copy quality.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MISFEED REMOVAL
Misfeed in the duplex unit
1 Remove the duplex unit.
4 Close the cover of the duplex unit.
Grasp the finger hold
and gently open the unit.
2 Open the cover of the duplex unit.
5 Gently close the duplex unit.
After closing the duplex
2
unit, confirm that the
misfeed message has
been cleared and the
normal display appears.
3 Remove the misfed paper.
Misfeed in upper part of unit
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
Misfeed in lower part of unit
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MISFEED REMOVAL
Misfeed in the paper feed area
NOTE
Be sure to follow the misfeed removal sequence. Do not pull the tray out immediately as the misfeed may have
occurred with paper partially fed out of the tray. Open the left cover and see if there is misfed paper first (steps 1
and 2). If you open the tray without checking, the partially fed paper may tear and leave torn pieces in the machine,
increasing the difficulty of removal.
■ Misfeed in paper tray 1 - tray 2
●If paper is misfed in tray 2 (right-side tray)...
1 Remove the duplex unit.
Grasp the finger hold
and gently open the unit.
When using tray 2,
2 Remove the misfed paper.
check the paper transfer
unit inside the tray and
remove any misfed
paper.
Turn roller rotating knob
A in the direction of the
arrow to remove the
misfed paper.
4 Gently close paper tray 1 - tray 2.
Roller rotating knob A
Push the tray all the way
back in.
NOTE
A misfeed may occur inside the compartment, so
please check the entire compartment carefully.
If misfed paper is not found in step 2, pull
out paper tray 1 - tray 2 and remove the
misfed paper.
3
5 Gently close the duplex unit.
Grasp the finger hold
and gently open the unit.
Pull the tray all the way
out until it stops.
After closing, confirm
that the misfeed
message has been
cleared and the normal
display appears.
●If paper is misfed in tray 1 (left-side tray)...
Lift the paper guide and
remove
paper.
the
misfed
Be sure to replace the
paper guide in its
original position after
removing the paper.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MISFEED REMOVAL
■ Misfeed in paper tray 3
Close the lower cover on the left side of
the machine.
1 Remove the duplex unit.
5
6
Grasp the finger hold
and gently open the unit.
2 Remove the misfed paper.
2
If misfed paper is not found in step 3, pull out
paper tray 3 and remove the misfed paper.
Pull the tray all the way
Turn roller rotating knob
A in the direction of the
arrow to remove the
misfed paper.
out until it stops.
Check the
paper
transfer unit inside the
tray.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
Roller rotating knob A
Open the lower cover on the left side of the
machine.
7 Gently close paper tray 3.
3
Grasp the finger hold
and gently open the unit.
Push the tray all the way
back in.
4 Remove the misfed paper.
8 Gently close the duplex unit.
Be careful not to tear the
After closing, confirm
misfed paper during
removal.
that
the
misfeed
message has been
cleared and the normal
display appears.
NOTE
A misfeed may occur inside the compartment, so
please check the entire compartment carefully.
■ Misfeed in the tray 4
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MISFEED REMOVAL
■ Misfeed in the bypass tray
Remove the misfed paper from the bypass
tray.
1
5 Remove the misfed paper.
Check the
paper
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
transfer unit inside the
tray and remove any
misfed paper.
6 Gently close paper tray 1 - tray 2.
If you did not find a misfeed in step 1, open
the side cover and remove the misfeed.
2
Push the tray all the way
back in.
Make sure that the
misfeed message no
longer appears (the
normal message display
should appear).
3 Gently close the side cover.
4 Remove tray 1 - tray 2.
Grasp the finger hold
and gently open the unit.
Pull the tray all the way
out until it stops.
NOTE
If a misfeed occurs during printing from the bypass
tray while paper is being loaded in tray 1 - tray 2,
push tray 1 - tray 2 back in to close it, and then pull
the tray out again.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MISFEED REMOVAL
■ Misfeed in the tray 5 (AR-LC6)
Open the top cover and remove the misfed
paper.
1 Open the side cover.
6
After
removing
the
misfed paper, close the
top cover.
2 Remove the misfed paper.
2
7 Remove tray 1 - tray 2.
Be careful not to tear the
Grasp the finger hold
misfed paper during
removal.
and gently open the unit.
Pull the tray all the way
out until it stops.
3 Gently close the side cover.
NOTE
If a misfeed occurs in the following situation, push
tray 1 - tray 2 back in to close it and then pull the tray
out again:
● A misfeed occurs during printing from tray 5 while
paper is being loaded in tray 1 or tray 2.
8 Remove the misfed paper.
Check the
paper
4 Close the bypass tray.
transfer unit inside the
tray and remove any
misfed paper.
9 Gently close paper tray 1 - tray 2.
Push the tray all the way
back in.
5 Open the top cover of tray 5.
Make sure that the
misfeed message no
longer appears (the
normal message display
should appear).
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MISFEED REMOVAL
■ Misfeed in the tray 5 (AR-LC7)
If a paper misfeed occurs, follow the steps below to remove the misfeed.
1 Open the side cover.
6 Remove the misfed paper.
Be careful not to tear
the misfed paper
during removal.
After removing the
misfed paper, close the
top cover.
2 Remove the misfed paper.
7 Pull out tray 1 - tray 2.
Be careful not to tear
the misfed paper
during removal.
Grasp the finger hold
and gently open the
tray.
Pull the tray all the way
out until it stops.
NOTE
3 Gently close the side cover.
If a misfeed occurs in the following situation, push tray
1 - tray 2 back in and then pull the tray out again:
● A misfeed occurs during printing from tray 5 (AR-
LC7) while paper is being loaded in tray 1 - tray 2.
8 Remove the misfed paper.
Check the
transfer unit inside the
tray. If there is
paper
4 Close the bypass tray.
a
misfeed in the paper
transfer unit, remove
the misfeed.
9 Gently push tray 1-tray 2 into the machine.
Push the tray firmly all
the way into the
machine.
5 Open the top cover of the AR-LC7 (tray 5).
Make sure that the
misfeed message no
longer appears (the
Hold the top cover
open.
normal
message
display should appear).
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED
Removing a misfed original from the automatic document feeder
If an original misfeed occurs in the automatic document feeder, follow the steps below to remove the misfed original.
NOTES
● For misfeed removal in the main unit and other peripheral devices, see page 2-23
● When a misfeed occurs, touch the [INFORMATION] key to display detailed information for misfeed removal.
Check locations A and B in the diagram at left to
remove the original.
2
Open and close the document feeder
cover.
1 Removing misfeeds from each location.
2
● Check location A
Opening and closing the
cover clears the misfeed
display. Copying cannot
be resumed until this
step is performed.
Open the document
feeder cover and gently
remove
the
misfed
original without tearing
it. Close the document
feeder cover.
However, this step is not
necessary
misfeed is removed from location B.
after
a
A message may appear indicating the number of
originals which must be returned to the document
feeder tray. Return the originals to the document
feeder tray and press the [START] key.
● Check location B
● Misfeed in the transfer unit
Open the document
transfer cover, hold the
paper guide open, and
remove
original.
the
misfed
● Misfeed in the document exit unit
Open the document
transfer cover. Rotate
the transfer roller in the
direction of the arrow
and gently remove the
original without tearing it.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Check the following troubleshooting list before requesting service as many problems can be fixed by the user. If you
are unable to solve the problem by checking the list, turn off the main power switch and the power switch, unplug the
power cord.
Problems related to general use of the machine are described below. For problems related to the copy function, see
page 6-3. For problems related to document filing, see page 7-31. For fax, printer, and network scanner/Internet fax
problems, see the manuals for those functions. For peripheral device problems, see the explanation of the device.
(Note)
If the message "CALL FOR SERVICE. CODE:**-**"
appears in the touch panel, turn off the main power switch
and the power switch, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the main power switch and the power switch back on.
If the message still appears after turning the main power switch and the power switch off and on several times, it
is likely that a failure has occurred that requires service. In this event, stop using the machine, unplug the power
cord, and contact your Sharp dealer.
Note: Letters and numbers appear in "**-**". When you contact your Sharp dealer, please tell your dealer what
letters and numbers appear.
Problem
Check
Machine plugged in?
Solution or cause
Plug the machine into a grounded outlet.
The main power switch and power Turn on the main power switch and the power
switch are not turned on?
switch. (Page 1-17)
The printer is warming up. (Warm-up time is
approximately 120 seconds.) Wait until the
READY indicator lights up.
READY indicator off?
The machine does
not operate.
Message indicating need to load paper
displayed?
Load paper. (Page 2-2)
Message indicating need to replace the
toner cartridge displayed?
Replace the toner cartridge. (Page 2-21)
Remove misfed paper. (Page 2-23)
Message indicating a paper misfeed
displayed?
A message appears saying that this type Two-sided printing is not possible on special
of paper cannot be used for two-sided paper. Use paper that can be used for automatic
Copying/printing is
not possible.
copying.
Incorrect display of paper sizes , A3, B4, When loading sizes A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17",
A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13" 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13" or 8-1/2" x 11"R, be
Incorrect
tray paper size.
bypass
or 8-1/2" x 11"R only.
The number of sheets placed on the bypass Do not place more than the maximum number of
tray exceeds the maximum number. sheets.
The bypass guide is not adjusted to the Adjust the bypass guide to the size of the loaded
size of the loaded paper. paper.
sure to open the tray extension.
Copying/printing on
paper from the
bypass
tray
is
skewed.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Check
Solution or cause
Be sure to set the paper size and paper type
when using special size or special type papers.
The paper size and paper type have not
been set.
Paper from the
bypass
misfeeds.
tray The number of sheets placed on the bypass Do not place more than the maximum number of
tray exceeds the maximum number. sheets.
The bypass guide is not adjusted to the Adjust the bypass guide to the size of the loaded
size of the loaded paper.
paper.
If too many pages collect on the output
tray, the tray full sensor activates and Remove the paper from the output tray.
stops printing.
Printing
before the job is
finished.
stops
2
The paper tray is out of paper.
Load paper. (Page 2-2)
Smudges on printed Does a message appear indicating the Please contact the your dealer as soon as
sheets
need for maintenance?
possible.
When loading paper, if you change the paper
size from an AB size to an inch size, or from an
inch size to an AB size, or change the paper
type, be sure to set the new paper type as
explained in "Setting the paper type and paper
The displayed paper
size or paper type The correct paper size or paper type is
does not match the not set in the paper tray settings of the
loaded paper size or system settings.
paper type.
When printing on a
When using a special size of paper, set the
special
size
of The paper size setting is not set correct paper size as explained in "Setting the
paper, part of the correctly in the paper tray settings of the paper type and paper size" on page 2-14. If the
printed image is system settings.
missing.
paper size setting is not correct, part of the image
may be cut off or the image may not be printed.
When printing on a
special size of paper
using the bypass The paper size is not set correctly in the
tray, part of the special size settings for the bypass tray.
printed image is
When using a special size of paper, set the
correct paper size as explained in "Setting the
paper size setting is not correct, part of the image
may be cut off or the image may not be printed.
missing.
Is
paper
other
than
SHARP-
Use SHARP-recommended paper. (Page 2-22
)
recommended paper being used?
Do not use curled or crimped paper. If you will
not use the paper for a long time, remove the
paper from the tray and store it in the wrapper in
a cool and dark location so that it will not absorb
moisture.
Paper curled or damp?
Paper may be curled when output depending on
the paper type and quality.
In some cases turning the paper over in the tray
Is the paper curled and does it
frequently misfeed in the finisher or
saddle stitch finisher?
Paper
misfeeds
will reduce misfeeding due to curling.
frequently.
Remove the paper
from the paper
tray or the bypass
tray, fan the paper
as shown in the
Multiple
simultaneously?
sheets
of
paper
fed
illustration,
and
then load it again.
Make sure that the paper in the paper tray is
stacked evenly. If the stack is not even, paper
misfeeds will occur.
The paper in the tray is not stacked
evenly.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Check
other than
recommended paper being used?
Solution or cause
Is
paper
SHARP-
Use SHARP-recommended paper. (Page 2-22
)
Is the paper size or weight outside the
specifications?
Use paper within the specifications.
Printed paper is
wrinkled or the
Be sure to store paper in the wrapper in a dry
location and do not store paper in a location that is
●humid
image
easily.
rubs
off
●at a high temperature or an extremely low
Paper damp?
temperature
●exposed to direct sunlight
●dusty.
The contrast on the
touch panel is too Is LCD contrast properly adjusted?
high or too low.
Adjust the screen contrast using "DISPLAY
CONTRAST" in "DEFAULT SETTINGS" of the
Load paper in the tray with the print side face up.
However, if the paper type is "PRE-PRINTED" or
"LETTER HEAD", load the paper with the print
side face down*.
* If the two-sided function has been prohibited
using "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the
administrator settings (page 11 of the
administrator settings guide), load the paper
face up.
The paper is loaded in the tray with the
Printing takes place
print side face down*.
on the wrong side of
* Face up if the paper type is "PRE-
the paper.
PRINTED" or "LETTER HEAD".
If the original image overlaps the punch holes,
marks will appear at the position of the holes on
the back of the paper after one-sided printing, or
on the front and back of the paper after two-sided
printing. Make sure that the original image does
not overlap the punch holes.
Marks appear at
regular intervals on Paper with punch holes is being used.
printed pages.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 3
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
This chapter explains the procedures for using the optional finisher,
saddle stitch finisher, and inserter, as well as Sharp OSA (application
communication module and external account module).
Page
●
Part names...................................................................................... 3-2
●
Specifications.................................................................................. 3-2
●
●
Finishing modes and finisher functions........................................... 3-6
●
●
●
INSERTER.............................................................................................. 3-14
●
Part names...................................................................................... 3-14
●
Specifications.................................................................................. 3-14
●
Loading paper ................................................................................. 3-15
●
●
Misfeed removal.............................................................................. 3-17
●
SHARP OSA........................................................................................... 3-19
APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-AMX2)..................... 3-19
●
Standard application setup.............................................................. 3-19
●
Selecting a standard application ..................................................... 3-19
●
Operation in OSA mode.................................................................. 3-20
EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3) ...................................... 3-21
●
External account application setup ................................................. 3-21
●
Operation in external account mode ............................................... 3-21
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
The finisher and the saddle stitch finisher include the offset function, which offsets each set of copies from the
preceding set for easy separation. Each set of sorted copies can also be stapled. The saddle stitch finisher can
automatically staple a set of copies at the centre line and fold the pages to create a pamphlet.
A punch module unit can be installed to add punch holes to copies, and an inserter can be installed to insert blank
pages at specified pages.
In the following explanations, the finisher and saddle stitch finisher are referred to simply as "finisher".
Part names
1
Tray
Offset pages and stapled
pages are delivered here.
2
Stapler compiler
Paper to be stapled is stacked
temporarily.
3
Top cover
Open for misfeed removal.
4
Punch module (Option)
Adds punch holes to printed pages.
Finisher
(AR-F15)
Saddle stitch
finisher (AR-F16)
5
6
7
Front cover
Open to replace the staple
case in the staple unit or clear
jammed staples.
Lower cover
Open to clear misfed paper or
replace the staple cartridge in the
pamphlet unit. (AR-F16 only)
Saddle stitch tray
Saddle stitched output is
delivered here.
Saddle stitch finisher
(AR-F16)
Finisher (AR-F15)
(AR-F16 only)
*
The illustrations on the following pages (to page 3-18) show the AR-F16; however, the operation of the AR-F15
is the same as the AR-F16.
NOTES
● Do not press on the finisher.
● Use caution when near the offset tray during printing as the tray moves up and down.
Specifications
Name
Finisher (AR-F15)
Saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16)
3
Face down output
Number of trays
Paper output
2
Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:
Non-stapling:
Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:
Non-stapling:
2000 sheets of paper or total aggregate 2000 sheets of paper or total aggregate thickness
thickness is within 250mm (9-53/64"):
is within 250mm (9-53/64"): A4, B5, A5R, 8-1/2" x
2
A4, B5, A5R, 8-1/2" x 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, (80
g/m (20 lbs.))
2
(80
g
/m (20 lbs.))
1000 sheets of paper or total aggregate thickness is
1000 sheets of paper or total aggregate within 140mm (5-1/2"): Sizes other than the above
Paper capacity
thickness is within 140mm (5-1/2")
Sizes other than the above
Stapling:
:
Stapling:
100 sets or 750 pages or total aggregate thickness is
within 110mm (4-5/16") of A4, B5 or 8-1/2" x 11" paper.
100 sets or 750 pages of A4, B5 or 8-1/2" 100 sets or 500 pages or total aggregate thickness
is within 74mm (2-29/32") of other sizes of paper
x 11" paper.
100 sets or 500 pages of other sizes of Lower tray:
paper
Stapled print capacity is (11 - 15) sheets x 10 sets, (6
- 10) sheets x 20 sets, (1 - 5) sheets x 25 sets.
(Continued on next page)
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:
Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17",
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8- 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2"
1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8- x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R
Paper size
1/2"R
Lower tray:
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R
Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:
Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray/Lower tray:
Paper weight
2
2
60 to 256 g/m (16 to 68* lbs.)
60 to 256 g/m (16 to 68* lbs.)
Paper full detection
Both upper and lower tray
Upper, middle and lower tray
Paper sizes for which
offset is possible
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R
Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray: Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R
Allowed paper sizes for
stapling
11"R
Lower tray:
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R
Maximum number of
sheets for stapling
3
Stapling positions
Paper conveying
Power supply
1 place at back, 1 place at back (diagonal), one place at front (diagonal), 2 places
Centre reference
Supplied from machine
When tray is folded up: 648 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x1150 mm(H)
(25-33/64" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) x 45-9/32" (H))
When tray is extended: 773 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x1150 mm(H)
(30-7/16" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) x 45-9/32" (H))
Not including stopper (40 mm (1-37/64")) when attached to machine
Dimensions
Weight
Approx. 51 kg (Approx. 113 lbs.)
Approx. 71 kg (Approx. 157 lbs.
)
Overall dimensions when 773 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) (Separation from machine 400 mm)
attached to machine (30-7/16" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) (Separation from machine 15-3/4"))
*For index paper, equivalent to 140-lbs.
Name
Punch module
1
2
3
3
Model*
AR-PN4A
2
AR-PN4B*
3 or 2
AR-PN4C*
4
AR-PN4D*
4
Number of holes
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 3 holes: A3, A4,
B5R, 11" x 17",
11"x17", 8-1/2"x14", 8-1/2" x 11"
A3, A4
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,
B5R,
11"x17", 8-1/2"x14",
8-1/2"x13",
8-1/2"x11",
8-1/2"x11"R
Paper sizes for hole
punching
8-1/2"x13",
8-1/2"x11",
8-1/2"x11"R
2 holes: 8-1/2"x14",
8-1/2"x13",
8-1/2" x 11"R
2
Paper weight
Power supply
Dimensions
Weight
60 to 256
Supplied from finisher / saddle stitch finisher
95 mm (W) x 560 mm (D) x 170 mm (H) (3-3/4 (W) x 22-1/16
Approx. 3.5 kg (Approx. 7.8 lbs.)
g/m (16 to 68 lbs.)
"
"
(D) x 6-45/64" (H))
*1 Multiple punch modules cannot be installed together. Some models may not be available in some regions.
*2 With AR-PN4B, two or three holes can be punched depending on the paper size.
*3 With AR-PN4C and AR-PN4D, the number of holes is the same. The hole interval, however, is not the same.
Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.
NOTES
● The following papers cannot be stapled and punched:
Special papers such as transparency film and label sheets
● If mixed paper sizes are selected for stapling jobs, stapling will be automatically cancelled.
■ Supplies
The finisher and saddle stitch finisher require the following staple cartridge:
● Staple cartridge for finisher
(approx. 5,000 per cartridge
X 3 cartridges)
● Staple cartridge for saddle
stitch finisher (approx. 2000
per cartridge X 3 cartridges)
AR-SC3
SF-SC11
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
Finishing methods
■ Sort mode
■ Offset mode
Sorted sets will be delivered.
Offset mode
Non-offset mode
Original
Printouts
■ Group mode
Each set of copies is offset from the preceding set to
allow easy separation.
(The offset function operates in the finisher / saddle
stitch finisher tray.)
Groups of copies of the same page will be
delivered.
The offset function cannot be selected when the
staple sort function is selected.
Offset width : Approx. 30 mm (Approx. 1-3/16")
Original
Printouts
■ Staple sort mode
Output pages are sorted into sets by the sort function, and each set is stapled and delivered to the tray. The centre
of the paper can also be stapled and delivered to the lower saddle tray (only when using the saddle stitch finisher).
The relations between possible stapling positions, the paper feed direction, paper sizes that can be used, and
number of pages that can be stapled are shown below.
2
Two sheets (one sheet when using the saddle stitch function) of 256 g/m (68 lbs.) paper can be included as
covers in the page stapling limit in the table below.
Stapling positions
Portrait orientation
Landscape orientation
Top left corner of
printouts
Available paper sizes:
A4, B5 and 8-1/2" x 11"
Stapling capacity:
Available paper sizes:
A3, B4, 11" x 17"
Stapling capacity:
For each size, up to 50 sheets
can be stapled
For each size, up to 30 sheets
can be stapled
Available paper sizes:
A4R, 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13",
8-1/2" x 11"R
Stapling capacity:
For each size, up to 30 sheets
can be stapled
Available paper sizes:
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17",
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13",
8-1/2" x 11"R
Lower left corner
of printouts
Same as above
Same as above
Stapling capacity:
For each size, up to 30 sheets
can be stapled
Centre left two
positions of
printouts
Same as above
Available paper sizes:
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17",
8-1/2" x 11"R,
Saddle stitch on
centrefold line.
(only when using
the saddle stitch
finisher)
Paper in the portrait
direction cannot be saddle
stitched.
Stapling capacity:
For each size, up to 15 sheets
can be stapled
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
■ Original orientation when using the staple sort or punch function
When using the staple sort or punch function, the original must be placed in the following orientations to enable
stapling or punching in the desired position on the paper.
Staple sort
Document feeder
Punch
Document feeder
Document glass
Document glass
3
■ Saddle stitch function (only saddle stitch finisher)
The saddle stitch finisher can automatically place
two staples for centreline binding of prints or copies
and fold them along the centreline.
<Example>
6
7
9
4
2
11
■ Hole punching (only if a punch module is installed)
When the optional punch module is installed, holes
can be punched in printed pages. (When using the
saddle stitch finisher, pamphlet style stapling and
the punch function cannot be used together.) When
using the punch function, automatic rotation of the
original image does not operate.
<Example>
{Original 1}
{Punch positions}
For the allowed paper sizes for punching, see the
specifications on page 3-3.
When using the punch function in copy mode,
place the original with the top toward the inside of
the machine. If the original is not placed in this
orientation, punching will not take place at the
correct positions. (See "Standard original
{Original 2}
{Punch positions}
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
Finishing modes and finisher functions
Touch the [OUTPUT] key on the main screen of copy mode to display the screen that allows selection of sort, staple
sort, group function, centreline stapling, and the output tray.
0
OUTPUT
SORT
OK
FINISHER
TRAY
CENTRE
TRAY
STAPLE
SORT
SADDLE
STITCH
PUNCH
GROUP
OFFSET
1
2
6
[CENTRE TRAY] key
When Group is selected, copies will be grouped by
page.
If the centre tray is selected, output paper will be
delivered to the exit tray located above the main
unit.
7
8
[OK] key
When Staple Sort is selected, sorted sets will be
stapled and delivered to the offset tray. (They will
not be offset stacked.) Select from three stapling
positions.
Touch to close the [OUTPUT] screen and return to
the main screen.
[SADDLE STITCH] key (See page 3-5.)
3
4
This is displayed when the saddle stitch finisher is
installed, and is used to staple pages at the centre
and fold them in half to create a pamphlet.
Touch this key to display the pamphlet copy
setting screen (page 5-6). (This is only possible
when the [AUTOMATIC SADDLE STITCH]
checkbox is selected in the administrator settings
(see page 12 of the administrator settings guide).)
When Sort is selected, sets of copies will be
collated.
When the offset function is selected, output is
delivered offset to the finisher tray. (The finisher
tray is automatically selected when the staple sort
function is turned on.)
9
[PUNCH] key (See page 3-5.)
This is used to punch holes in printed pages when
an optional punch module is installed.
5
[OFFSET] key (See page 3-4.)
The offset function operates when a checkmark
appears in this key. (The offset checkmark is
automatically cleared when the staple sort function
is enabled.)
NOTE
When a functions is selected, it is highlighted.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal
When a finisher is installed, a message will appear when the staple cartridge runs out of staples or a staple jam
occurs.
Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge or remove jammed staples.
■ Replacing the cartridge in the finisher
Pull the seal that holds the staples straight
out.
1 Open the front cover of the finisher.
5
6
3
Insert the cartridge all the way in until it
clicks into place.
Lower the blue lever in the stapler and
2
slide out the staple cartridge.
Insert the cartridge all
the way in until it clicks
into place.
7 Close the front cover of the finisher.
Pull the empty staple case straight up and
out of the cartridge.
3
NOTE
Insert a new staple case into the cartridge.
4
Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to
verify that stapling is performed properly.
Push the staple case all the way in until it
clicks into place.
Do not remove the seal
holding the staples until
the staple case is set in
the cartridge.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
■ Replacing the cartridge in the saddle stitch finisher
Only when the saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16) is installed.
Return the saddle stitch holder and the
saddle stitch unit to their respective
original positions.
Open the lower cover of the saddle stitch
finisher.
5
1
2
3
When
an
optional
inserter is installed,
open the front cover of
the
inserter
before
opening the lower cover
of the finisher.
Slide out the saddle stitch unit carefully
toward the front.
Make sure that the finisher is firmly
attached to the machine and that A3, A4R,
or B4 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, or 8-1/2" x
14") size paper is loaded.
6
If one of the above paper sizes is not set, test
stapling cannot be performed.
7 Close the lower cover of the finisher.
(1) Grasp the grip of the saddle staple
holder and pull it out.
(2) While still grasping the grip, rotate the
saddle staple holder 90° in the direction of
the arrow (rotate to the right).
(2)
Test
stapling
is
automatically performed
on a blank sheet.
This operation is carried
out to avoid blank
stapling.
(1)
NOTE
If test stapling fails to take place, repeat steps 1 to 7.
Remove the empty staple case and set a
new one.
4
Replace both staple
cases with new ones.
Remove the cover from
the staple cartridge and
then install the cartridge.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
■ Removing a staple jam in the finisher
Holding the knob, return part (A) to its
original position.
Perform steps 1 to 2 of the procedure for
"Replacing the cartridge in the finisher"
on page 3-7.
4
5
1
2 Holding the knob, lower part (A).
Stapling area
(A)
Return the staple case to its original
position.
(A)
Insert the cartridge all
the way in until it clicks
into place.
3
NOTE
Do not touch the stapling area.
The stapler could injure you.
3 Remove any jammed staples.
6 Close the front cover of the finisher.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
■ Removing a staple jam in the saddle stitch finisher
Return the staple case to its original
position.
Perform steps 1 to 3 of the procedure for
5
1
2 Remove the empty staple case.
Return the saddle stitch holder and the
saddle stitch unit to their respective
original positions.
6
7
While pushing down on lever (A), pull up
knob (B) .
Make sure that the finisher is firmly
attached to the machine and that A3, A4R,
or B4 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, or 8-1/2" x
14") size paper is loaded.
3
(A)
(B)
If one of the above paper sizes is not set, test
stapling cannot be performed.
8 Close the lower cover of the finisher.
Test stapling is automatically performed on a blank
sheet.
Remove any jammed staples, and then
return knob (B) to its original position.
4
This operation is carried out to avoid blank
stapling.
(B)
Be sure to remove any
strips of staples.
NOTE
If test stapling fails to take place, repeat steps 1 to 7.
Jammed staples
NOTE
Do not touch the stapling area.
The stapler could injure you.
■ Disposal of hole punch scrap (when the punch module is installed)
Holding the black handle, slide out the
case containing the paper bits, and
dispose of them properly.
1 Open the cover of the hole punch module.
2
Return the waste case to its original
position.
3
4 Close the cover of the hole punch module.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
Removing a misfeed
When a misfeed occurs, remove the misfed paper as explained below.
■ General procedure for the finisher and saddle stitch finisher
Gently move the finisher/saddle stitch
finisher away from the machine while
pressing the button.
Remove any misfed paper from the paper
exit area.
1
6
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
When an inserter is
installed, separate the
inserter
from
the
machine while pressing
on the inserter button.
Close the upper cover of the finisher/
saddle stitch finisher.
7
Remove the misfed paper from the main
unit.
3
2
3
4
After
removing
the
misfed paper, perform
steps 1 and 3 on page 2-
24 to reset the machine.
■
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed
Open the front cover of the inserter (only
when an inserter is installed).
Open the upper cover of the finisher/
saddle stitch finisher.
8
When an inserter is
installed, lift the tray of
the inserter.
(A)
Lift knob (A) (See the step 3 figure), then
remove any misfed paper.
Open the lower cover of the saddle stitch
finisher.
9
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
(B)
Lift knob (B) (see the illustration in step 4)
and remove any misfed paper.
Be careful not to tear the
Open the entrance cover of the saddle
stitch unit.
5
10
misfed paper during
removal.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
Close the lower cover of the saddle stitch
finisher.
11Remove the misfed paper.
17
18
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
Close the front cover of the inserter (only
when an inserter is installed).
Close the entrance cover of the saddle
stitch unit.
12
13
1
Turn the right-hand knob
clockwise. Then, push the left-hand knob
counter
■ When a punch module is installed
19Open the cover of the hole punch module.
2
and turn it clockwise.
Rotate the green knob until the arrow is
20
Remove any paper misfed on the exit side
of the saddle stitch unit.
Be careful not to tear the
14
15
16
within the range (A) on the label, and
remove the misfed paper.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
misfed paper during
removal.
(A)
removal.
Open the exit cover of the saddle stitch
unit and remove any misfed paper.
Be careful not to tear the
21Close the cover of the hole punch module.
misfed paper during
removal.
Close the exit cover of the saddle stitch
unit.
Push the finisher back against the main
unit.
22
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
Troubleshooting finisher/saddle stitch finisher problems
Check the list below before calling for service.
Problem
Check
Solution or cause
Stapling position is
not
(including
stitch).
correct
saddle
Check the stapling position setting. (See page
3-4.)
Stapling position not set properly?
covers open?
The finisher/saddle
stitch finisher does
not operate.
Remove all remaining paper from the stapler
compiler. (For the stapler compiler, see "Part
Message indicating need to remove paper
from the stapler compiler displayed?
Message to check the staple unit Remove jammed staples. (See pages 3-9 and
displayed?
3-10.)
Replace the staple cartridge. (See pages 3-7
3
Message to add staples displayed?
Stapling cannot be
performed (including
saddle stitch).
Stapling cannot be performed on mixed paper
sizes.
Different sizes of paper mixed together?
The paper is badly curled.
The quality and type of some papers may
cause bad curling that prevents stapling.
Take the paper out of the tray or bypass tray,
turn the stack over, and reload it.
Saddle stitch is not possible on heavy paper.
Saddle stitch cannot The paper type of the selected paper tray However, when cover insertion is selected,
be selected.
is set to heavy paper.
saddle stitch is possible on a single sheet of
heavy paper inserted for use as a cover.
The punch hole
positions are not
correct.*
The punch function is not set to the correct Check the allowed hole punch positions. (See
punch positions.
Message to check the punch module
displayed?
Dispose of punch scraps. (See page 3-10.)
Punching is not possible when different paper
sizes are mixed together.
Mixed paper sizes.
Cannot be punched.*
The quality and type of some papers may
cause bad curling that prevents punching.
Take the paper out of the tray or bypass tray,
turn the stack over, and reload it.
The paper is badly curled.
* When a hole punch module is installed
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSERTER
The inserter enables blank sheets or printed sheets to be added to copy and print output as covers or inserts
without printing. The inserter also allows feeding of heavy paper that cannot be fed from the other trays.
Printed output can also be fed one set at a time from the inserter for stapling or punching without performing
When feeding from the inserter for pamphlet copying (page 5-6), cover or insert copying (page 5-12), or
transparency insert copying (page 5-23), select "INSERTER" in step 4 of "Setting the paper type and paper size"
(page 2-14), and be sure to perform steps 5 through 8. In step 9, make sure that the checkboxes below "PRINT",
"COPY", and "DOC. FILING" are selected. If any of these checkboxes are not selected, touch them so that a
checkmark appears.
When feeding from the inserter for pamphlet copying (page 5-6), cover or insert copying (page 5-12), or
transparency insert copying (page 5-23), select the inserter in the tray settings. The inserter attributes can also
Part names
1
Paper tray
Place blank or printed paper here to be inserted.
2
Paper guide
When loading paper, adjust this guide to the width of the paper.
3
Top cover
Open for misfeed removal.
4
Inserter operation panel
Stapling and punching can be performed directly
from the inserter operation panel without using the
machine operation panel.
5
Paper guide lever
Release the paper guide lock to remove misfed paper.
6
Front cover
Open this cover to remove misfed paper from the
finisher or saddle stitch finisher.
NOTE
To install the inserter...
Specifications
Name
Inserter (AR-CF2)
2
Paper weight
60 to 256 g/m (16 lbs. to 68* lbs.) *For index paper, equivalent to 140-lbs.
Plain paper, special paper (transparency film, coloured paper, paper with punch holes,
tabbed paper, etc.)
Paper types
(Consult your retailer for more information on special papers that can be used.)
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13",
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R
Paper size
2
Paper capacity
Paper conveying
Power supply
Max. 100 (80 g/m (20 lbs.))
Centre reference
Supplied from machine
When paper tray is folded up: 285 (565*) mm (W) x 585 mm (D) x 1120 mm (H)
(11-15/64" (22-1/4"*) (W) x 23-3/64" (D) x 44-7/64" (H))
Not including stopper (40 mm (1-37/64")) when attached to machine
* Including paper tray
Dimensions
Weight
Approx. 24 kg (Approx. 53 lbs.)
Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSERTER
Loading paper
When loading paper in the inserter, load the paper face up. If the paper has a top edge and bottom edge, load in
the same top-bottom orientation as the original. Adjust the paper guide on the paper tray to the width of the paper.
When using tabbed paper, place the paper as follows:
Load the paper back
side up.
The top side is
inserted first.
Back side
The relation of copies and tabbed sheets is shown below.
Load tabbed paper
Copy
Back
side
Back
side
Back
side
Inserted first.
3
1st sheet 2nd sheet 3rd sheet 4th sheet 5th sheet
5th sheet
1st sheet
4th sheet
Back
side
Tabbed paper 4th sheet (back side)
Copy result
Tabbed paper 1st sheet (back side)
Manual operation of the inserter
The inserter can be used for stapling or punching without performing a copy operation. These functions are selected
at the operation panel of the inserter.
1
2
3
[PUNCH] key
[START] key/indicator
1
When a punch module is installed on the finisher
or saddle stitch finisher, punch holes can be
added to blank paper or printed paper. The
indicator lights when this function is selected.
After selecting punch or staple settings with key
2
or key
, place the paper to be punched or
stapled on the inserter tray and press this key.
[STAPLE] key/indicator
When this function is selected, each set of output
is stapled and delivered to the finisher or saddle
stitch finisher tray. (Note that the sets are not
offset.) Press this key until the icon light of the
desired staple position lights up. (" " pamphlet
stapling can only be selected when a saddle stitch
finisher is installed)
NOTES
● Do not use tabbed paper when operating the inserter manually.
● The punching and stapling functions cannot be used when the finisher or saddle stitch finisher has failed, or
when the functions are prohibited* in the administrator settings (page 11 of the administrator settings guide).
* Disabling of stapler/Disabling of punch/Disabling of finisher/Disabling of inserter
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSERTER
■ Alarm display
If the [START] key indicator on the inserter operation panel is blinking and the [PUNCH] key or [STAPLE] key
indicator is also blinking or solidly lit, operation will not start when the [START] key is pressed. Resolve the
problem as indicated below, depending how the indicators are lit or blinking.
[PUNCH]
indicator
[START]
indicator
[STAPLE] indicator
Cause
Solution
A paper size that cannot
Blinks red be fed has been loaded.
Use paper that is a suitable
size for punching, stapling, or
saddle stitching (page 3-3).
Any one of the indicators is solidly lit.
The paper type of the
Blinks red inserter is set to heavy
paper.
Heavy paper cannot be
used.
Solidly
lit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
The finisher or saddle
stitch finisher tray is full.
Remove the paper from
the tray.
The hole punch scrap
Blinks red
Discard the hole punch
scrap (page 3-10).
Blinking
-
-
container in the punch
module on the finisher or
saddle stitch finisher is full.
The finisher or saddle
stitch finisher tray is full.
Remove the paper from
the tray.
Any one of the
indicators is blinking.
-
-
Blinks red
Blinks red
The finisher or saddle
stitch finisher is out of
staples.
Replace the staple
The saddle stitch tray on
the saddle stitch finisher is the saddle stitch tray.
full.
Remove the paper from
-
-
-
Blinking
The saddle stitch finisher is Replace the saddle stitch
■ Using the inserter
For paper sizes that can be stapled or punched, see the finisher and saddle stitch finisher specifications on
Some paper types cannot be stapled or punched (see "NOTES" on page 3-3). Do not use these paper types.
1 Load paper in the inserter.
NOTE
Pamphlet stapling can only be used when the saddle
stitch finisher (AR-F16) is installed.
Load the paper face up.
When performing
Paper guide
pamphlet stapling, place
the paper so that the
opened pages are face
up as shown.
Adjust the paper guide
to the size of the paper.
When using pamphlet stapling, stapling and
punching cannot be used in combination.
3 Press the [START] key.
Make sure that the
[START] key light is
illuminated green and
then press the [START]
key.
2 Press the desired mode key.
2
1
stapling. Press key
The selected mode lights up.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSERTER
Misfeed removal
When a misfeed occurs in the inserter, remove the misfed paper following the procedure below.
■ Misfeed in the inserter
6 Remove the misfed paper.
Gently move the inserter away from the
machine while pressing the button.
1
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
If a misfeed was not found in step 6,
remove the misfed paper from under the
paper guide.
Remove the misfed paper from the main
unit.
7
2
3
3
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
After
removing
the
misfed paper, perform
steps 1 and 3 on page 2-
24 to reset the machine.
If misfed paper is not found in step 2, open
the top cover.
Return the paper guide lever to its original
position.
8
9
4 Remove the misfed paper.
Push the finisher to close the gap between
the machine and the inserter.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
After
attaching
the
inserter on the machine,
make sure that the paper
misfeed message has
been cleared and the
normal message display
appears.
If a misfeed was not found in step 4, raise
the paper guide lever.
5
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSERTER
Troubleshooting inserter problems
Check the list below before calling for service.
Problem
Check
Solution or cause
Select the desired staple mode at the
The desired staple mode is not selected.
Stapling position is
not
(including
stitch).
correct The paper is not loaded in the correct
saddle position.
Load the paper correctly (page 3-16).
Paper must be loaded face up in the inserter
tray (page 3-16).
The paper is not loaded face up.
Are any inserter covers open?
Close all covers.
"Disabling of inserter" is enabled in the Check the administrator settings and disable
administrator settings.
"Disabling of inserter".
The inserter does
not operate.
A paper misfeed message appears.
Remove the misfed paper (page 3-17).
Make sure that the punch or staple key has
been selected on the operation panel of the
The [START] key light is not illuminated.
The paper is curled or damp.
Do not use curled or folded paper. When the
inserter is not going to be used for a long time,
remove the paper from the inserter, place it in
a bag so that it does not absorb moisture, and
store it in a cool and dark place.
Paper
misfeed
occurs
A
paper misfeed Do the size and orientation of the loaded
Make sure paper size and orientation set in
"Setting the paper type and paper size" match
the size and orientation of the loaded paper.
occurs when paper paper match the paper size and orientation
is fed from the set in "Setting the paper type and paper
inserter.
size"?
To ensure that the correct paper (size and
orientation) is loaded in the inserter, the
machine indicates the current paper size
setting each time paper is placed in the paper
tray.
A message appears Was the [SIZE SELECT] key touched and
each time paper is the size and orientation of the paper for the
placed in the paper inserter set as explained in "Setting the
tray of the inserter.
paper type and paper size"?
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SHARP OSA
Sharp OSA (Open Systems Architecture) is an architecture that enables external applications to be directly
connected to a digital multifunction machine over a network.
When a digital multifunction machine that supports Sharp OSA is used, the operation panel controls and functions
of the machine such as scan send can be linked to an external application.
There are two types of external applications: "standard application" and "external account application". An "external
account application" is used for centralized account management of a multifunction machine on a network. A
"standard application" refers to all other applications.
APPLICATION COMMUNICATION
MODULE (MX-AMX2)
The application communication module is required to use a "standard application" on the machine.
When a previously registered standard application is selected in the Web pages of the machine, the machine
retrieves the operation screen from the registered URL. Control of the operation screen is performed by the standard
application, and Scan to FTP can be executed.
3
Standard application setup
To register a standard application in the machine's Web pages, click [External Applications] in the administrator menu
frame and then click [Standard Applications]. Configure settings for the standard application in the screen that
appears.
Selecting a standard application
There are two methods for selecting a standard application that has been registered in the machine's Web pages.
■ Selecting a standard application from the job status screen
The Sharp OSA icon will appear in the lower left-hand corner of the job status screen. Follow the steps below to
select a standard application.
1 Touch the Sharp OSA icon.
2 Select the standard application.
If
no
standard
If two or more standard
App 01
App 02
App 03
App 04
applications have been
stored in the Web pages,
the key cannot be
touched.
applications have been
stored in the Web pages,
the screen to select the
standard application will
appear.
Touch
the
standard application that
you wish to use.
If only one standard application has been stored in
the Web pages, connection to the standard
application will begin.
The machine connects to the standard
application.
3
The message "Connecting to the external
application." appears while the machine
communicates with the standard application.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-AMX2)
■ Selecting the standard application from document filing mode
The [Sharp OSA] key appears in the upper right-hand corner of the document filing screen. Follow the steps
below to select a standard application.
1 Touch the [Sharp OSA] key.
2 Select the standard application.
If
no
standard
If one or more standard
App 01
App 02
App 03
App 04
applications have been
stored in the Web pages,
the key cannot be
touched.
applications have been
stored in the Web pages,
the screen to select the
standard application will
Sharp OSA
FILE TRIEVE
F
FOLDER
appear.
standard application that
you wish to use.
Touch
the
QUICK FILE
FOLDER
If only one standard application has been stored in
the Web pages, connection to the standard
application will begin.
The machine connects to the standard
application.
The message "Connecting to the external
application." appears while the machine
communicates with the standard application.
3
Operation in OSA mode
When the application communication module is installed, it is possible to check the job log of OSA scan mode in the
job status screen. The procedure for displaying the job log is the same as for regular Scan to FTP.
To display the job log of OSA scan mode, touch the [SCAN] key once again while the job log of scan mode appears
in the job status screen. (When this is done, the name of the key will change to [OSA SCAN].) To return to the scan
screen from the OSA scan screen, touch the [OSA SCAN] key.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3)
The external account module is required to use a "external account application" on the machine.
An external account application can be used in "external authentication mode" or "external count mode". When
external authentication mode is used, the login screen is retrieved from the application when the machine is started.
When a job ends, a job notification screen is sent to the application to enable counts to be kept for each authenticated
user.
When "external count mode" is used, the login screen is not displayed when the machine is started. Only a job result
notification is sent to the application. User authentication by the external account application cannot be used,
however, the external account application can be used in combination with the internal account function.
External account application setup
To register an external account application in the machine's Web pages, click [External Applications] in the
administrator menu frame and then click [External Accounting]. Configure settings for the external account
application in the screen that appears. To make the settings in the Web page take effect, restart the machine.
Operation in external account mode
3
The two modes for using an external account application operate as explained below.
■ External authentication mode
When the [ENABLE AUTHENTICATION BY EXTERNAL SERVER] checkbox is selected in "External account
setting" of "Sharp OSA settings" in the administrator settings, the machine enters external authentication mode.
When the machine is powered on in external authentication mode, the machine accesses the external account
application and displays the login screen. The login screen also appears when the [CALL] key is touched to run
a job in the job status complete screen. (The login screen does not appear if the user has already logged in by
the normal method.)
The [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed while the login screen appears to show the job status screen. To return
to the previous state, press the mode select key.
NOTES
● The user control function of the machine cannot be used in external authentication mode.
● The [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key can be pressed while the login screen appears to show the system settings
screen. To return to the initial state, touch the [EXIT] key.
If login fails
If the login screen fails to appear or the application does not operate correctly, the machine may also stop operating
correctly. In this event, it is recommended that you quit external account mode from the Web pages of the machine.
For more information, see [Help] in the Web pages.
If it is necessary to forcibly terminate external account mode using the operation panel of the machine, follow the
steps below.
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key and change "External account setting" in the administrator settings (see page
14 of the administrator settings guide). After changing the setting, restart the machine.
■ External count mode
When only the [ENABLE EXTERNAL ACCOUNT CONTROL] setting is enabled in "External account setting" of
"Sharp OSA settings" in the administrator settings, the machine enters external count mode.
Unlike external authentication mode, when the machine is started in "external count mode", the login screen of
the external account application is not displayed. Only the job result is sent to the external account application.
External count mode can be used together with the user control function of the machine. (External count mode
can also be used when the user control function is disabled.)
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part 2: Copier Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 4
MAKING COPIES
This chapter explains the basic procedures for making copies, including
selection of the copy ratio and other copy settings.
Page
●
●
●
Storing or deleting an original size.................................................. 4-6
●
●
function............................................................................................ 4-10
●
●
ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE .....................................................................4-14
●
●
Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom).................................... 4-16
●
XY ZOOM........................................................................................ 4-18
SPECIAL PAPERS.................................................................................. 4-20
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER
The automatic document feeding function automatically feeds originals into the machine, making continuous copying
possible. In addition, both sides of two-sided sheet originals can be simultaneously scanned. This function is
convenient when you have a large number of original pages to scan.
Acceptable originals
2
Up to 150 originals (80 g/m (20 lbs.)) of the same size, or an overall stack height of no more than 19.5 mm (49/64"),
can be loaded. Originals of mixed length can also be loaded together as long as they are the same width; however,
some special functions may not operate correctly.
■ Size and weight of acceptable
■ Total number of originals that can be
originals
set in the document feeder tray
2
●
Maximum of 150 sheets (80 g/m (20 lbs.)) or
A5 or
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
total stack height of 19.5 mm (49/64") or less.
Original size:
A3 or
11" x 17"
(148 x 210 mm)
Weight (thickness):
(297 x 420 mm)
50g/m2 or 14 lbs.
128 g/m2 or 42 lbs.
Special heavy papers
2
(176 g/m2 (65 lbs.), 205 g/m (110 lbs.)) can be used.
g/m2 ... Weight of a sheet of paper of 1 m2
■ Notes on use of the automatic document feeder
●Use originals within the specified size and weight ranges. Use of originals out of the specified range may cause
an original misfeed.
●Before loading originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips.
●If originals have damp spots from correction fluid, ink or glue from pasteups, be sure they are dried before they
are fed. If not, the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled.
●Do not use the following originals. These originals may cause incorrect original size detection, original
misfeeds, and smudges on copies.
●
Transparency film, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink
ribbon should not be fed through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be
damaged, crumpled or folded or have loosely pasted paper on them or cutouts in them. Originals with multiple
punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole punched paper may not feed correctly.
●When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that the
punched edge is at a position other than the feed slot.
Hole positions
Hole
positions
Hole positions
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PLACING ORIGINALS
■ Using the automatic document
■ Using the document glass
feeder
Open the document cover, make sure that
an original has not been left on the
document glass, and then gently close the
document cover.
Open the document cover, place the
original face down on the document glass,
and then gently close the document cover.
1
NOTES
Adjust the original guides to the size of the
originals.
2
● After placing the original, be sure to close the
document cover. If left open, parts outside of the
original will be copied black, causing excessive
use of toner.
● Do not place any objects under the original size
detector, because they may damage it or the
original size may not be detected properly.
4
Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Document glass scale
mark
Document glass scale
mark
3
Place the originals face
up.
Insert the originals all
B5
the
way
into
the
A4 or 8½x11
B4 or
B5
8½x14
document feeder. The
stack height must not be
higher than the indicator
A4 or 8½x11
A3 or 11x17
●Align the corner of the original with the tip of the
arrow mark on the document glass scale.
line (maximum of 150 pages).
●Place the original in the appropriate position for its
size as shown above.
NOTE
Original size detection function
One of the four groups of standard original sizes shown below can be selected for detection by the original size
detection function. The factory default setting is "AB-2". The setting can be changed using "ORIGINAL SIZE
DETECTOR SETTING" in the administrator settings.
Detectable original sizes
Group
Document feeder tray (for reversing automatic document feeding)
Document glass
1
2
AB-1
AB-2
A3, A4, A4R, A5,B4, B5, B5R
Document glass + 8-1/2" x 11", 216x330
A3, A4, A4R, A5,B5, B5R, 216x330
Document glass + 8-1/2" x 11", B4
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11",
8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
3
4
INCH-1
INCH-2
Document glass + A4
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11",
8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
Document glass + A4
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PLACING ORIGINALS
■ Standard original placement orientations
[Example 1]
Document feeder tray
Document glass
Place
originals
in
the
document feeder tray or on
the document glass so that
the top and bottom of the
original is positioned as
shown in the illustration. If not,
staples will be incorrectly
positioned and some special
features may not give the
expected result.
[Example 2]
Document feeder tray
Document glass
■ Automatic copy image rotation - rotation copying
If the orientation of the originals and copy paper are different, the original image will be automatically rotated 90°
and copied. (When an image is rotated, a message will be displayed.) If a function is selected that is not suitable
for rotation, such as enlarging the copy to greater than A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size or staple sorting with the saddle
stitch finisher, rotation will not be possible.
[Example]
Orientation of original
Orientation of paper
Copy after rotation
Face down
Face down
●This function operates in both the auto paper select or auto image mode. ("Rotation copy setting" can be
disabled in the administrator settings. See page 16 of the administrator settings guide.)
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED
ORIGINAL
If the placed original is a standard size, the size will be automatically
detected (automatic original detection function) and displayed in the touch
panel. Make sure that the correct size has been detected.
(A) :The original size is displayed.
0
AUTO
A4
ORIGINAL
(B) :[AUTO] appears when the automatic original detection function is
operating.
AUTO
EXPOSURE
If you have loaded a non-standard size original or wish to change the
scanning size, you can follow the steps below to manually set the original
scanning size. (For the standard sizes, see "Original size detection
function" on page 4-3.)
(A)
(B)
NOTE
If a non-standard size original is loaded (including special sizes), the closest standard size may be displayed,
or the original size may not appear at all.
If "CANCEL DETECTION AT DOCUMENT GLASS" is enabled in the administrator settings (see page 11 of the
administrator settings guide), automatic original detection at the document glass will not operate. In this case,
follow the steps below to manually set the original scanning size.
Manually setting the scanning size
4
If you load an original that is not a standard size (such as an INCH size), or if the size is not detected correctly, you
must touch the [ORIGINAL] key and set the original size manually. Perform the following steps after placing the
document in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.
If a non-standard size original is placed in
1 Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.
the document feeder or on the document
glass, touch the [SIZE INPUT] tab and then
0
enter the X (width) and Y (length)
dimensions of the original.
AUTO
ORIGINAL
X
OK
X is initially selected.
Y
Enter the X dimension
(64 432)
(width) and then touch
the Y( ) key and enter
the Y dimension (length).
X can be from 64 to 432
mm, and Y can be from
64 to 297 mm.
AUTO
EXPOSURE
X
Y
420
mm
(64 297)
mm
297
STANDARD SIZE
SIZE INPUT
2 Touch the desired original size key.
OK
[AUTO] is no longer
highlighted. [MANUAL]
and the original size key
you
highlighted.
A5
A4
A4R
B4
If you frequently use originals that are the same
non-standard size, you can store the size as
ORIGINAL SIZES"on the following page. This will
save you the trouble of manually entering the size
each time you use that original size.
A5R
AB
B5
INCH
touched
are
A3
B5R
STANDARD SIZE
SIZE INPUT
3 Touch the [OK] key.
If you wish to select an INCH size, touch
the [AB/INCH] key and then touch the
desired original size key.
You will return to the initial screen.
The selected original size appears in the
4
top half of the [ORIGINAL] key.
[INCH] is highlighted
OK
1
1
1
/
/
/
2X
8 13
X
52 82
0
and INCH size keys are
displayed. To return to
the AB palette, touch the
[AB/INCH] key once
again.
1
1
1
/
/
/
X
52 82R
X
82 14
AB
1
/
2
8 X11
1
/
2X
X
8
11
1117
INCH
ORIGINAL
1
/
X
82
STANDARD SIZE
SIZE INPUT
AUTO
EXPOSURE
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STORING, DELETING, AND USING
ORIGINAL SIZES
Up to 9 special original sizes can be stored. Stored sizes can be easily called up and are not erased if the power is
turned off. Storing a frequently used original size saves you the trouble of manually setting the size each time you
copy that size of document.
● To cancel an original size storing, using, or deleting operation, touch the [ORIGINAL] key on the screen.
Storing or deleting an original size
Enter the X (width) and Y (length)
1 Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.
5
dimensions of the original with the
keys.
0
X
AUTO
ORIGINAL
CANCEL
OK
X
(width) is initially
Y
selected.
A
X
Y
(64 432)
mm
Enter X and then touch
the ( ) key to enter Y.
A width of 64 to 432 mm
can be entered in X, and
a length of 64 to 297 mm
420
297
AUTO
EXPOSURE
(64 297)
mm
RECALL
STORE/DELETE
2 Touch the [CUSTOM SIZE] key.
can be entered in Y.
AUTO
AUTO
AB
EXPOSURE
6 Touch the [OK] key.
MANUAL
INCH
AUTO
A4
The original size entered in step 5 is stored in the
key selected in step 4.
PAPER SELE
CUSTOM
SIZE
100%
E INPUT
COPY RATI
To exit, touch the [ORIGINAL] key.
When you touch a key that shows an
original size in step 4, a message screen
appears that contains the keys [CANCEL],
[DELETE], and [STORE].
7
3 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.
AUTO
●To cancel the procedure, touch the [CANCEL]
MANUA
key.
●To delete the selected original size, touch the
[DELETE] key.
CUSTO
SIZE
LL
STORE/DELETE
●To change the original size stored in the key,
touch the [STORE] key. The screen of step 5
will appear to let you change the size.
Touch the original size key (
you wish to store or delete.
) that
8 To exit, touch the [ORIGINAL] key.
4
To store an original size,
touch a key that does not
X68 Y78
■ USING A STORED ORIGINAL SIZE
show a size (
).
Follow steps 1 to 2 of "STORING OR
DELETING AN ORIGINAL SIZE".
1
Keys that already have
an original size stored
RECALL
STORE/DELETE
will show the stored size
Touch the original size key that you wish
to use.
2
X68 Y78
(
).
To delete or change a stored size, touch the key
that shows the size that you wish to delete or
change.
X68 Y78
●If you are storing an original size, go to step 5.
●To delete or change an original size, go to
step 7.
RECALL
STORE/DELETE
3 Touch the [OK] key.
The stored original size is called up.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NORMAL COPYING
This section describes the normal copying procedure.
Making copies with the automatic document feeding
function
■ 1-sided copies of 1-sided originals
Original
Copy
Place the originals in the document feeder
1
2
5 Touch the [OK] key.
0
OK
4
Ensure that paper of the same size as the
6
originals is automatically selected*.
Ensure that the 1-sided to 1-sided copy
mode is selected.
AUTO
The selected tray will be
EXPOSURE
highlighted
or
the
The one-sided to one-
A4
ORIGINAL
message "LOAD xxxxxx
PAPER." will appear. If
the message appears,
load paper in a paper
tray with paper of the
required size.
sided mode is selected
AUTO A4
PAPER SELECT
1
2
3
1
2
3
when no icon for a two-
sided mode appears in
the dashed area on the
display. If the 1-sided to
1-sided copy mode is
A4
1.
2.
B5
5.
A4
100%
A4
3.
4.
B4
A3
already selected, steps 3 to 5 are not needed.
Even if the message above appears, copying can
be performed onto the currently selected paper.
3 Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.
*The following requirements must be satisfied.
Originals of a standard size (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,
B5R or A5 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-
1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2R")) are set and the
auto paper select function is enabled.
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
If originals of a size other
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.
than the sizes above are
1. A4
PLAIN
2. B5
PLAIN
A4
to be copied, manually
select the desired paper
size by touching the
[PAPER SELECT] key
and then touching the
PLAIN
PLAIN
PLAIN
5. A4
PLAIN
3. B4
4. A3
4 Touch the [1-sided to 1-sided copy] key.
Touch the [1-sided to 1-
sided copy] key.
desired paper size selection key.
The selected key will be highlighted and the paper
selection screen will close. To close the paper
selection screen without making a selection, touch
the [PAPER SELECT] key.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NORMAL COPYING
The sort mode is the
default mode.
To select the group
If the [C] key is pressed
while originals are being
scanned, scanning will
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
mode,
touch
the
stop. If copying had
[OUTPUT] key, then
touch the [GROUP] key
on the output setting
already started, copying
and scanning will stop
after the original in
FILE
screen, and then touch the [OK] key on the setting
screen.
progress is output to the original exit area. In these
cases the copy quantity will be reset to "0".
Use the numeric keys to set the desired
number of copies.
8
NOTES
● The 1-sided to 1-sided copying mode is set as the
default in the initial settings. If the default setting
has not been changed using the "Initial status
settings" (administrator settings), steps 3 to 5 on
page 4-7 can be omitted.
Up to 999 can be set.
If you are only making a
single copy, the copy can
be made with the copy
number display showing
"0". Use the [C] (clear)
key to cancel an entry if
a mistake has been made.
LOGOUT
To cancel copying...
To cancel a copy job in progress, press the [CA]
key. A confirmation message will appear. Touch
the [YES] key to cancel copying.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NORMAL COPYING
■ Copy output (sort and group)
Example: Making five sets or five copies each of three originals
● Sorting copies into sets
Original
Five sets of copies
OUTPUT
SORT
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
GROUP
LOGOUT
Press the [START]
key
Touch the
[OUTPUT] key
Touch the
[SORT] key
Set the
number of
copies (5)
When using the automatic document feeding function,
sorting is automatically selected when the original is placed
in the document feeder.
● Grouping copies by page
Original
4
5 copies per page
OUTPUT
SORT
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
GROUP
LOGOUT
Press the [START]
key
Touch the
[OUTPUT] key
Touch
[GROUP] key
the
Set the
number of
copies (5)
"Group" is automatically selected when the
original is placed on the document glass.
■ Selecting the output tray (when an optional finisher or saddle stitch finisher is
installed)
When the [FINISHER TRAY] key is highlighted, output pages are delivered to the finisher tray of the finisher or
saddle stitch finisher. When the "CENTRE TRAY" key is highlighted, output pages are delivered to the centre
tray. Touch the appropriate key to select the desired output tray.
0
OUTPUT
SORT
OK
FINISHER
TRAY
CENTRE
TRAY
STAPLE
SORT
SADDLE
STITCH
PUNCH
GROUP
OFFSET
This screen appears when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
The screen that appears when a finisher is installed is slightly different.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NORMAL COPYING
Automatic two-sided copying using the automatic
document feeding function
The machine can automatically copy two-sided originals, saving you the trouble of manually turning over each
original page.
Original
Copy
1. Automatic two-sided copying from one-sided
originals
2. Automatic two-sided copying from two-sided
originals
3. Automatic one-sided copying from two-sided
originals
Place the originals in the document feeder
1
3 Select the desired copy mode.
The display will vary
ED COPY
depending
on
the
equipment installed.
If a copy key is touched for a mode that cannot
be selected, a double beep will sound.
2 Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.
Example of a
landscape-oriented
original
Example of a
portrait-oriented
original
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
When making automatic two-sided copies of a
one-sided A3 (11" x 17") or B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size
portrait original, or when you wish to invert the top
and bottom of the back side of a two-sided original,
touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.
4 Touch the [OK] key.
0
OK
BINDING
Perform steps 6 through 9 on pages 4-7 and 4-8.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NORMAL COPYING
Copying from the document glass
When copying originals which cannot be fed from the automatic document feeder such as thick originals, open the
document cover and copy the originals from the document glass.
■ 1-sided copies of 1-sided originals
Original
Copy
Place the original on the document glass.
Ensure that paper of the same size as the
original is automatically selected*.
1
3
AUTO
The selected tray will be
EXPOSURE
highlighted
or
the
message "LOAD xxxxxx
PAPER." will appear. If
the message appears,
load paper in a paper
tray with paper of the
AUTO A4
PAPER SELECT
4
100%
required size.
Even if the message above is displayed, copying
can be performed onto the currently selected
paper.
* The following requirements must be satisfied.
Originals of a standard size (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,
B5R or A5 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-
1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)) are set and the
auto paper select function is enabled.
Document glass scale
mark
Document glass scale
mark
B5
A4 or 8½x11
B4 or
8½x14
B5
If originals of a size other
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.
A4 or 8½x11
A3 or 11x17
than the sizes above are
to be copied, manually
select the desired paper
size by touching the
[PAPER SELECT] key
and then touching the
1. A4
PLAIN
2. B5
PLAIN
A4
●Align the corner of the original with the tip of the
arrow mark on the document glass scale.
●Place the original in the appropriate position for its
PLAIN
PLAIN
PLAIN
5. A4
PLAIN
3. B4
4. A3
size as shown above.
desired paper size selection key.
The selected key will be highlighted and the paper
selection screen will close. To close the paper
selection screen without making a selection, touch
the [PAPER SELECT] key.
Ensure that the 1-sided to 1-sided copy
mode is selected.
2
The one-sided to one-
ORIGINAL
A4
sided mode is selected
when no icon for a two-
sided mode appears in
the dashed area on the
display. If an icon
appears, perform steps
2
2
2
1
1
1
A4
1.
A4
3.
4.
2.
B5
B4
A3
5. A4
3 to 5 on page 4-7 and then go to step 3.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NORMAL COPYING
Select the desired output mode. (page 4-
4
6 Press the [START] key.
Replace the original with
Group mode is the
default mode.
the next original and
press the [START] key.
Repeat this operation
until all originals have
been scanned.
2-SIDED COPY
To select sort mode,
touch the [OUTPUT]
key, touch the [SORT]
OUTPUT
key in the screen that
appears, and then touch
the [OK] key.
FILE
If you selected "Sort" for
the output mode in step 4 and pressed the
[START] key, it is necessary to touch the [READ-
END] key.
Use the numeric keys to set the desired
number of copies.
5
7 Touch the [READ-END] key.
Up to 999 can be set.
If you are only making a
single copy, the copy can
be made with the copy
number display showing
"0".
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].
READ-END
LOGOUT
Use the [C] (clear) key to
cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.
To cancel copying...
To cancel a copy job in progress, press the [CA] key.
A confirmation message will appear. Touch the
[YES] key to cancel copying.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NORMAL COPYING
Automatic two-sided copying from the document glass
The following two-sided copying function is possible. The copy paper is turned over automatically, allowing easy two-
sided copying.
Original
Copy
Place an original on the document glass.
1
3 Touch the [1-sided to 2-sided copy] key.
4
Example of a
landscape-oriented
original
Example of a
portrait-oriented
original
Document glass scale
mark
Document glass scale
mark
B5
A4 or 8½x11
B4 or
8½x14
B5
A4 or 8½x11
A3 or 11x17
When making automatic two-sided copies of a
one-sided A3 (11" x 17") or B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size
portrait original, or when you wish to invert the top
and bottom of the back side of a two-sided original,
touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.
●Align the corner of the original with the tip of the
arrow mark on the document glass scale.
●Place the original in the appropriate position for its
size as shown above.
4 Touch the [OK] key.
2 Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.
0
OK
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
BINDING
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE
Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original to be copied. The selections are AUTO, TEXT, TEXT/PHOTO
and PHOTO.
■ Automatic exposure adjustment
AUTO
ORIGINAL
The default exposure
setting is "AUTO", which
automatically
adjusts
AUTO
EXPOSURE
the exposure for the
original. To select the
exposure mode, or to
manually adjust the
AUTO A4
exposure level, follow the steps below.
■ Selecting the exposure mode and manually adjusting the exposure level
1 Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.
3 Adjust the exposure level.
Touch the
make darker copies.
Touch the key to
make lighter copies.
key to
AUTO
MANUAL
5
ORIGINAL
AUTO
EXPOSURE
1
3
AUTO A4
NOTE
Select [TEXT], [TEXT/PHOTO] or [PHOTO]
as appropriate for the original to be
Exposure levels in TEXT mode
2
copied.
1 to 2: Dark originals such as newspaper
0
3:
Normal density originals
AUTO
ORIGINAL
ORIGINAL
OK
4 to 5: Originals written with pencils or light colour
characters
IMAGE TYPE
AUTO
MANUAL
5
TEXT
TEXT/PHOTO
PHOTO
EXPOSURE
AUTO A4
PAPER SELECT
1
3
100%
COPY RATIO
About the steps that follow
To select [TEXT], touch the [AUTO MANUAL]
key so that [MANUAL] is selected.
If an automatic document feeder is being used,
13.
Exposure modes selection
TEXT:
This mode is useful for producing
dark text copies with minimum
background.
TEXT/PHOTO: This provides the best balance for
copying an original which contains
both text and photos. This mode is
also useful for copying printed
photographs.
NOTES
● To return to the automatic exposure mode, touch
the [AUTO / MANUAL] key to highlight [AUTO],
and then touch the [OK] key.
● The exposure level used in automatic exposure
mode can be adjusted in the administrator
settings. See "Exposure adjustment" on page 16
of the administrator settings guide.
PHOTO:
This mode provides the best copies
of photographs with fine details.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
Reduction and enlargement ratios can be selected automatically or manually.
● Automatic selection: Auto image (see below)
● Manual selection: Preset copy ratios/zoom (see page 4-16)
Automatic selection (auto image)
The reduction or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically based on the original size and the selected paper size.
Place the original in the document feeder
tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3
1
3 Touch the [AUTO IMAGE] key.
5. A4
The detected original size will be displayed.
AUTO
NOTE
IMAGE
Automatic ratio adjustment can only be used for the
following original and paper sizes. It cannot be used
for other sizes. However, in the case of non-standard
original and paper sizes, the sizes can be entered to
make automatic ratio adjustment possible for those
sizes.
The [AUTO IMAGE] key
PAPER SELECT
will be highlighted and
the best reduction or
enlargement ratio for the
original size and the
selected paper size will
O
GE
122%
COPY RATIO
Original sizes:Standard sizes (see "Original size
detection function" on page 4-3.)
be
selected
and
Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5R
(11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-
1/2" x 11"R, or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)
4
displayed in the copy ratio display.
NOTE
If the message "ROTATE ORIGINAL FROM
TO
" is displayed, change the orientation of the
original as indicated in the message. When the
message above is displayed, copying can be done
without changing the orientation, but the image will
not fit the paper correctly.
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then
select the desired paper size.
2
The selected paper size
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.
key is highlighted and
the paper selection
screen closes.
1. A4
PLAIN
2. B5
PLAIN
A4
PLAIN
HEAVY PAPER
PLAIN
5. A4
PLAIN
3. A4
4. A3
Use the numeric keys to set the desired
number of copies.
4
Up to 999 can be set.
If you are only making a
single copy, the copy can
be made with the copy
number display showing
"0".
NOTE
If paper of the desired size is not loaded in any tray,
load paper of the required size in a paper tray or the
bypass tray. (See "Setting the paper type and paper
LOGOUT
Use the [C] (clear) key to
cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.
5 Press the [START] key.
If you placed the original
on the document glass,
set the output mode to
"Sort", and pressed the
[START] key, you must
touch the [READ-END]
key after all pages of the
original have been scanned. (Step 7 on page 4-12)
To cancel the auto image mode, touch the [CA] key.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom)
Five preset enlargement and five preset reduction copy ratios (max. 400%, min. 25%) can be selected. In addition,
the zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
<The administrator settings on page 16 of the administrator settings guide can be used to set two additional
enlargement ratios and two additional reduction ratios.>
Place the original in the document feeder
tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3
Use the reduction, enlargement, and
[ZOOM] keys on the touch panel to set the
desired copy ratio.
1
4
NOTE
When the original is placed in the document feeder,
the ratio can be set from 25% to 200%.
ZOOM
2 Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.
XY ZOOM
MENU
AUTO A4
PAPER SELECT
Zoom ratios: Any ratio
from 25% to 400% can
be set in 1% increments.
70
100%
COPY RATIO
ZOOM
Touch the [
increase the ratio, or the
] key to decrease
] key to
[
MENU
XY ZOOM
the ratio. (If you continue
] key, the ratio will change
automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will
change rapidly.)
Use the [MENU] key to select menu " " or
menu " " for copy ratio selection.
Menu
3
to touch the [
]/[
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.
0
NOTES
● Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set the
approximate ratio, then touch the [ ] key to
] key to decrease the
AUTO
OK
ORIGINAL
ZOOM
AUTO
EXPOSURE
AUTO
A4
increase the ratio or the [
ratio.
PAPER SELECT
AUTO
IMAGE
MENU
XY ZOOM
COPY RATIO
● Automatic changing of the ratio when a zoom key
is continuously touched can be disabled in the
administrator settings (see "Key operation setting
(prohibit key repeat)" on page 10 of the
administrator settings guide).
● If the message "IMAGE IS LARGER THAN COPY
PAPER." appears when a ratio is selected, the
image may not fit on the copy paper.
●A.Preset reduction copy ratios are:
70%, 81% and 86% (for the AB system).
77% and 64% (for the inch system).
●B.Preset enlargement copy ratios are:
115%, 122% and 141% (for the AB system).
121% and 129% (for the inch system).
Menu
● To set the horizontal and vertical copy ratios
separately, use the XY ZOOM feature. See page
4-18.
0
AUTO
ORIGINAL
OK
ZOOM
AUTO
5 Touch the [OK] key.
EXPOSURE
AUTO
A4
PAPER SELECT
0
AUTO
AUTO
IMAGE
XY ZOOM
MENU
OK
COPY RATIO
ORIGINAL
AUTO
EXPOSURE
●A.Preset reduction copy ratios are:
50% and 25%.
●B.Preset enlargement copy ratios are:
200% and 400%.
AUTO
A4
PAPER SELECT
AUTO
IMAGE
IO
COPY RATIO
(The custom ratios set by the administrator appear
in ratio menu 2.)
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
Make sure that an appropriate paper size
has been selected based on the selected
6
8 Press the [START] key.
ratio.
If you placed the original
on the document glass,
set the output to "Sort",
ORIGINAL
AUTO
EXPOSURE
A4
and
pressed
the
Auto paper select display
B4
AUTO
[START] key, you must
touch the [READ-END]
key after all pages of the
5. A4
PAPER SELECT
4
86%
COPY RATIO
original have been scanned. (Step 7 on page 4-12)
To return the ratio to 100%
NOTE
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [COPY
RATIO] key to display the ratio menu and then touch
the [100%] key. (Steps 2 and 3 on page 4-16.)
If the auto paper select display does not appear, a
tray with the correct size of paper for the selected
ratio will not be automatically selected.
Use the numeric keys to set the desired
number of copies.
7
Up to 999 can be set.
If you are only making a
single copy, the copy can
be made with the copy
number display showing
"0".
4
LOGOUT
Use the [C] (clear) key to
cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
XY ZOOM
The XY ZOOM feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed separately. The ratios can be set
from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
Example: Selecting 100% for the length and 50% for the width
Copy
Original
Place the original in the document feeder
tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3
Use the reduction, enlargement, and
1
5
ZOOM ([
], [
]) keys to change the
copy ratio in the horizontal (X) direction.
Y 10 A fixed ratio key will not
64%
NOTE
become
highlighted
ZOOM
When the original is placed in the document feeder,
the ratio can be set from 25% to 200%.
when touched.
50%
2 Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.
XY ZOOM
AUTO A4
PAPER SELECT
Zoom ratios: Any ratio
from 25% to 400% can
be set in 1% increments.
50
X
100%
COPY RATIO
Y
100
Touch the [
increase the ratio, or the
] key to decrease
] key to
ZOOM
[
the ratio. (If you continue
] key, the ratio will change
automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will
change rapidly.)
to touch the [
]/[
3 Touch the [XY ZOOM] key.
NOTES
● Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set the
approximate ratio, then touch the [ ] key to
] key to decrease the
MENU
XY ZOOM
increase the ratio or the [
ratio.
● Automatic changing of the ratio when a zoom key
is continuously touched can be disabled in the
administrator settings (see "Key operation setting
(prohibit key repeat)" on page 10 of the
administrator settings guide).
4 Touch the [X] key.
The initial state of the [X]
key is selected
100
100
X
Y
(highlighted), so this
step normally is not
necessary. Touch the [X]
key only if it is not
highlighted yet.
6 Touch the [Y] key.
ZOOM
50
X
Y 100
OM
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
Use the reduction, enlargement, and
Select any desired copy settings such as
the exposure or number of copies, and
then press the [START] key.
7
10
ZOOM ([
], [
]) keys to change the
copy ratio in the vertical (Y) direction.
A fixed ratio key will not
70%
become
highlighted
X
Y
50
70
when touched.
64%
50%
ZOOM
50
70
The zoom keys can be
used to change the ratio
from 25% to 400% in
increments of 1%.
Y
ZOOM
To cancel an X or Y zoom setting...
Touch the [XY ZOOM] key or the [CANCEL] key in
If needed, you can touch
the [X] key once again to
readjust the X zoom.
XY ZOOM
CANCEL
8 Touch the [OK] key.
OK
141%
4
200%
100%
A
PA
400%
If needed, touch the [PAPER SELECT] key
and select the paper size.
9
0
If the AUTO PAPER
SELECT mode is on, the
appropriate copy paper
size will have been
automatically selected
based on the original
size and selected copy
ratios.
AUTO
ORIGINAL
A4
AUTO
EXPOSURE
N
PLAIN
APER
5. A4
PLAIN
PAPER SELECT
N
X-50% Y-
COPY RAT
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL PAPERS
Special papers including transparency film, postcards and tabbed paper must be fed through the bypass tray.
Place the original in the document feeder
tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3
1
5 Select the bypass tray.
0
AUTO
ORIGINAL
A4
AUTO
EXPOSURE
N
HEAVY PAPER
PAPER
N
5. A4
PLAIN
PAPER SELECT
100%
COPY RATIO
Select any desired copy settings such as
the exposure or number of copies, and
then press the [START] key.
6
2 Load the special paper in the bypass tray.
specifications of paper
that can be used in the
bypass tray.
When copying from the
document glass in the
sort mode using the
[START] key, touch the
[READ-END] key after
all originals have been
scanned (step 7 on page
4-12).
For the paper loading
instructions,
see
10).
3 Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key.
AUTO
4
EXPOSURE
AUTO A4
PAPER SELECT
100%
Set the type and size of paper loaded in the
4
bypass tray.
0
1
The (X) key shows the
AUTO
currently
paper type.
selected
ORIGINAL
A4
AUTO
EXPOSURE
N
HEAVY PAPER
APER
5. A4
PLAIN
PAPER SELECT
2
The (Y) key shows the
size of paper loaded
in the bypass tray.
N
100%
COPY RATIO
(X)
(Y)
3
To change the displayed paper type, touch the
(X) key before touching the (Y) key. When
loading paper, if you changed the paper size
from an AB size to an inch size (or from an inch
size to an AB size), or if you changed the paper
type, be sure to change the paper type and size
settings as explained in steps 5 to 7 on page 2-
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5
CONVENIENT COPY
FUNCTIONS
This chapter explains special-purpose functions, storing of copy
settings, and other convenient functions. Please select and read
sections of this chapter as needed.
Page
SPECIAL MODES................................................................................... 5-2
●
●
Margin shift...................................................................................... 5-3
●
Erase............................................................................................... 5-4
●
●
●
Job build.......................................................................................... 5-8
●
Tandem copy................................................................................... 5-10
●
Covers/inserts ................................................................................. 5-12
●
●
Multi shot......................................................................................... 5-24
●
Book copy ....................................................................................... 5-26
●
Tab copy.......................................................................................... 5-27
●
Card shot......................................................................................... 5-29
●
Mirror image.................................................................................... 5-31
●
B/W reverse..................................................................................... 5-31
●
Print menu....................................................................................... 5-32
STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB PROGRAMS......................... 5-44
●
●
●
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main screen of copy mode to open the special modes screen. The following
functions can be selected in the special modes screen.
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES]
key in the main screen.
READY O SCAN FOR COPY.
0
OK
1/3
SPECIAL MODES
AUTO
ORIGINAL
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
ORIGINAL A4
DUAL PAGE
COPY
AUTO
EXPOSURE
MARGIN SHIFT
ERASE
A4
AUTO A4
PAPER SELECT
1.
A4
3.
2.
JOB
BUILD
TANDEM
COPY
A4
B5
PAMPHLET COPY
FILE
B4
A3
100%
4.
QUICK FILE
COPY RATIO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Margin shift (page 5-3)
Erase (page 5-4)
[OK] key on the special modes screen
Touch the [OK] key to return to the main screen of
copy mode.
Dual page copy (page 5-5)
Pamphlet copy (page 5-6)
Job build (page 5-8)
/
key
Touch these keys to change the special modes
screen.
Tandem copy (page 5-10)
There are three special modes screens.
Touch the key to change to the other two screens.
●The following special functions can be selected in the 2nd screen (2/3).
Covers/inserts (page 5-12)
●The following special functions can be selected in the 3rd screen (3/3).
Mirror image (page 5-31)
General procedure for using special functions
To select a special function in one of the other two
1 Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.
screens, use the
screen.
/
keys to change the
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
Setting procedures for modes requiring setting
screens start on the next page.
The dual page copy, job build, tandem copy,
mirror image and B/W reverse functions do not
require setting screens.
Touch the key for the desired special
2
mode.
Example:
SPECIAL MODES
Selecting the margin
shift function
MARGIN SHIFT
PAMPHLET COPY
ERASE
JOB
BUILD
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Margin shift
The margin shift function will automatically shift the text or image on the copy paper approximately 10 mm (1/2") in
its initial setting.
This function is convenient when stapling or binding copies with a string.
NOTE
The initial setting for the margin width can be changed in the administrator settings to any value from 0 to 20 mm
(0" to 1") (page 16 of the administrator settings guide).
●The shift direction can be selected from right or left
shift as shown in the illustration.
One-sided copying
Image shifted
to the right
Image shifted
to the left
Original
Margin
Margin
Two-sided copying
Original
Image shifted
to the right
Image shifted
to the left
Or
5
Margin
Margin
Set the shift amount as needed and touch
the [OK] key.
3
To display the special modes screen...
Use the
keys to set the shift
amount. The shift
amount can be set from
0 to 20 mm in 1 mm (0"
to 1" in 1/8") increments.
and the
OK
CANCEL
OK
SIDE 1
SIDE
Touch the [MARGIN SHIFT] key on the
special modes screen.
1
(0 20)
)
10
10
mm
mm
The margin shift setting
SPECIAL MODES
screen will appear.
The margin shift icon
MARGIN SHIFT
ERASE
(
) will also appear in
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes
screen.
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
4
JOB
BUILD
the upper left of the
screen to indicate that
the function is turned on.
PAMPHLET COPY
About the steps that follow
2 Select the shift direction.
If an automatic document feeder is being used,
Touch a shift direction
key to select right or left.
The selected key will be
highlighted.
RIGHT
LEFT
To cancel the margin shift function, touch the
[CANCEL] key on the margin shift setting screen
(step 3).
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Erase
The erase function is used to erase the shadow lines on copies produced when copying thick originals or books. The
erase modes that can be selected are shown below. The erase width is approximately 10 mm (1/2") in it's initial
setting.
NOTE
The initial setting for the erasure width can be changed in the administrator settings to any value from 0 to 20 mm
(0" to 1") (page 16 of the administrator settings guide).
Original
Copy
EDGE ERASE
Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of
copies caused when heavy paper or a book is used
as an original.
CENTRE ERASE
Eliminates shadow lines produced by the bindings
of bound documents.
EDGE + CENTRE ERASE
Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of copies
and eliminates the shadow at the centre of copies.
Adjust the amount of erase and touch the
[OK] key.
To display the special modes screen...
3
4
Use the
and
keys
CANCEL
EDGE
OK
to set the erase width to
any value from 0 to 10
mm in increments of
1 mm (0" to 1" in 1/8").
Touch the [ERASE] key on the special
modes screen.
(0 20)
mm
1
10
The erase setting screen
MODES
will appear.
DUAL
C
RGIN SHIFT
PHLET COPY
ERASE
The erase icon ( ) will
also appear in the upper
left of the screen to
indicate that the function
is turned on.
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes
screen.
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
BUILD
TAN
C
About the steps that follow
2 Select the desired erase mode.
If an automatic document feeder is being used,
Select one of the three
erase modes. The
ERASE
EDGE
ERASE
CENTRE
ERASE
EDGE+CENTRE
ERASE
selected key will be
highlighted.
NOTE
When erase is used, edge erase takes place at the
edges of the original image. If you also use a ratio
setting, the edge erase width will change according
to the set ratio.
To cancel the erase function, touch the [CANCEL]
key on the erase setting screen (step 3).
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Dual page copy
The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two documents placed side by side on the document glass.
This function is especially useful when copying books and other bound documents.
[Example] Copying right and left pages of a book
Book original
Dual page copy
●The dual page copy function can be used only
when copying from the document glass. The
automatic document feeder cannot be used with
this function.
●Only 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) paper can be used.
Ensure that A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size paper is
selected.
To display the special modes screen...
4
If A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size
paper is not selected,
AUTO A4
PAPER SELECT
touch
the
[PAPER
Touch the [DUAL PAGE COPY] key on the
special modes screen.
SELECT] key to select
A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size
paper.
1
OK
The
[DUAL
PAGE
100%
COPY] key will be
highlighted to indicate
that the function is
turned on, and the dual
1/3
DUAL PAGE
COPY
RASE
JOB
NDEM
COPY
BUILD
About the steps that follow
page copy icon (
) will
For two-sided copying, follow steps 2 through 4
5
appear in the upper left
of the screen.
For one-sided copying, follow steps 4 through 6
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes
screen.
2
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
NOTE
3 Place the originals on the document glass.
To erase shadows caused by document binding, use
and Edge + Centre Erase cannot be used in
combination.)
When copying a thick
book, press down lightly
on the book to flatten it
against the document
glass.
To cancel the dual page copy function, touch the
[DUAL PAGE COPY] key on the special modes
screen (screen of step 1).
1
/
Index
A4
8
2" x 11"
This page
is copied
first.
Centre line of
original
B4
1
/
B5
A4(8 " x 11")
(8 " x 14")
2
1
/
A3 (11" x 17")
2
Place the opened original on the document glass so
that the first page you wish to copy is on the right and
the centre of the original is aligned with the size mark.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Pamphlet copy
The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange copies in proper order for eventual centre-stapling and folding into a
booklet. Two original pages are copied onto each side of copy paper. Four pages are, therefore, copied onto one sheet.
This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
NOTE
To make pamphlet copies of a book or other bound original, use the book copy function (page 5-26). The book copy
function scans the opened original in two-page units. (Two pages are scanned at each scan, reducing the number
of repetitions of the scanning operation by a half.)
[Example] Copying eight originals in the pamphlet copy mode
● Scan the originals from the first page to the last
Originals
(one-sided)
Finished copies are
folded in two.
page. The order of copying will be automatically
adjusted by the machine.
● Either left binding (right to left turning) or right
binding (left to right turning) can be selected.
Left binding
1
2
3
4
5
●
Four originals will be copied onto one sheet.
Blank pages may be automatically produced at
the end depending on the number of the originals.
6
First page
7
8
● If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, copies can
be stapled in two positions along the centre of
copies and folded at the centre.
Originals
(two-sided)
2
4
6
8
Right binding
1
3
First page
5
7
Select the binding position (left binding or
right binding).
To display the special modes screen...
3
LEFT
RIGHT
BINDING
BINDING
C
SE
Touch the [PAMPHLET COPY] key on the
special modes screen.
1
SPECIAL MODES
The PAMPHLET COPY
setting screen will
MARGIN SHIFT
ERASE
appear. The pamphlet
copy icon ( , etc.) will
also appear in the upper
left corner of the screen
to indicate that the
function is turned on.
JOB
BUILD
PAMPHLET COPY
If you wish to insert a different type of paper for use as
a cover, follow steps 4 through 12 below.
If you do not wish to insert paper for a cover, continue
from step 8 on the next page.
4 Touch the [COVER SETTING] key.
Designate the type of originals to be
copied: 1-sided or 2-sided.
2
CANCEL
OK
Select the [2-SIDED] key
if you wish to scan a two-
RIGHT
ORIGINAL
NG
BINDING
1-SIDED
2-SIDED
sided original using the
automatic document
feeding function.
COVER
SETTING
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Select whether or not you wish to copy on
the cover ("YES" or "NO").
PRINT ON COVER
Place the original in the document feeder
or on the document glass. (page 4-3)
5
9
Ensure that the desired paper size has
been automatically selected based on the
original size.
10
YES
NO
To select another size
paper, select the desired
size and touch the
[AUTO IMAGE] key. The
appropriate copy ratio
AUTO A3
PAPER SELECT
6 Select the paper tray for the cover.
will
be
selected
100%
1
The currently selected
paper tray for the
cover is displayed.
CANCEL
OK
automatically based on
the original size and the paper size. (See steps 2
PAPER TRAY
BYPASS
TRAY
2
The size and type of
paper in the currently
Select any desired copy settings such as
the exposure or number of copies, and
then press the [START] key.
A4
11
12
PLAIN
selected
tray
is
displayed.
In the example screen above, A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
size plain paper is loaded.
To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the
tray selection key. (In the screen example, the
"BYPASS TRAY" display is the tray selection key.)
[When using the automatic document
feeder:]
Copying will start after all originals have been
scanned. (The next step is not needed.)
The tray selection screen appears when the tray
selection key is touched. Select the desired tray in
this screen.
[When using the document glass:]
Replace the original with the next original and
press the [START] key. Repeat this operation until
all originals have been scanned and then touch
the [READ-END] key.
5
NOTES
● When the cover paper is fed from the inserter, the
cover cannot be copied on.
NOTES
● Two-sided copying is not possible on label sheets,
transparency film, and tabbed paper. When
copying on a cover, do not select a tray that has
one of these types of paper.
● When the pamphlet copy function is set, the two-
sided copying mode will be automatically selected.
● If this function is used in combination with the
pamphlet copy function (pamphlet stapling) and
the number of origial pages exceeds the number
of pages that can be stapled, a message asking
you to select "CANCEL", "CONTINUE", or
"DIVIDE" will appear.
7 Touch the [OK] key.
CANCEL
OK
To cancel the job, select "CANCEL". To make
pamphlet copies without stapling, select
"CONTINUE". To divide the pages into sets that
can be stapled, select "DIVIDE".
RIGHT
BINDING
G
COVER
SETTING
If you performed steps 4 to 6 to insert cover paper,
divided stapling is not possible. You can either
continue pamphlet copying without stapling, or
cancel the job.
8 Touch the [OK] key.
Return to the main
screen of copy mode.
OK
To cancel the pamphlet copy function, touch the
[CANCEL] key on the pamphlet copy setting screen
(step 2).
CANCEL
RIGHT
LEFT
BINDING
BINDING
COVER
SETTING
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Job build
Use job build mode when you need to copy more original pages than can be loaded at once in the document feeder
(the maximum number of pages that can be loaded is 150). This function allows the original pages to be scanned in
sets.
[Example] Copying 300 pages of A4 originals
Originals
1
151
1
A:150 sheets B:150 sheets
300 original pages
*Divide the originals into sets of 150 pages each.
Scan the originals starting from the first page of set
A. Scan set B next, taking care to keep the correct
page order.
Make sure that the desired paper size is
selected, select the number of copies or
other copy settings, and press the
[START] key.
4
To display the special modes screen...
Scanning of originals will
start. After scanning of
the first set of originals (A
in the example above) is
completed, remove the
Touch the [JOB BUILD] key on the special
modes screen.
1
ES
The [JOB BUILD] key
will be highlighted to
indicate that the function
is turned on, and the job
DUAL
COP
N SHIFT
ERASE
scanned originals, place
the next set of originals
JOB
BUILD
TANDE
COPY
LET COPY
build icon
(
)
will
(set B in the example) and press the [START] key.
Repeat this operation until all sets of originals have
been scanned.
appear in the upper left
of the screen.
If you wish to adjust the copy settings each time
you place a set of originals, see "Changing the
copy settings for each set of originals" on the next
page.
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes
screen.
2
Return to the main
screen of copy mode.
OK
5 Touch the [READ-END] key.
1/3
DUAL PAGE
RASE
INTERRUPT
COPY
ES
A4
ORIGINAL
TANDEM
COPY
JOB
BUILD
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].
TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS,
PRESS [CHANGE].
CHANGE
4.
READ-END
A3
Place the first set of originals in the
document feeder tray. (page 4-3)
C
3
To cancel the job build function, touch the [JOB
BUILD] key on the special modes screen (step 1).
The highlighted display will be cancelled.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Changing the copy settings for each set of originals
When using job build mode, you can change the copy settings each time you place a set of originals.
5 Touch the [CHANGE] key.
7 Touch the [READ-END] key.
INTERRUPT
INTERRUPT
A4
A4
ORIGINAL
ORIGINAL
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].
TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS,
PRESS [CHANGE].
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].
TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS,
PRESS [CHANGE].
CHANGE
.
READ-END
CHANGE
4.
READ-END
A3
A3
C
C
Select the desired copy settings in the
screen that appears and press the
[START] key.
6
INTERRUPT
[START].
The copy settings that
can be selected are
"EXPOSURE", "PAPER
SELECT", and "COPY
RATIO".
ORIGINAL A4
READ-END
AUTO
EXPOSURE
A4
AUTO
PAPER SELECT
A4
1.
A4
3. B4
4. A3
2.
B5
A4
5.
100%
COPY RATIO
If you touch the [READ-
END] key now, copying
will
begin
without
scanning the new set of
originals.
5
NOTES
● If the original size was set manually at the beginning of the job build procedure, it will not be possible to change
the original size setting. If the automatic original detection function is operating, the original size will be detected
for each set of originals placed.
● When the bypass tray is selected, it is not possible to change the paper type.
● If "XY ZOOM" was initially set for the ratio, it will not be possible to change the ratio setting.
● When job build mode is used in combination with any of the following functions, the [CHANGE] key will not
appear in the screen of step 5.
Pamphlet copy, tandem copy, covers/inserts, transparency inserts, multi-shot, book copy, tab copy, staple sort,
saddle stitch
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Tandem copy
Two machines connected to the same network can be used to run a large copy job in parallel.
By dividing the job in half, approximately half the time is required to complete the job.
To use this function, two machines must be connected to your network as network printers. Even if more machines
are connected to the network, this function can only be used to have one other machine share a job.
Server machine and client machine
●In the following explanations, the machine on which
the copy job is initially set up and tandem copy
selected is called the server machine. The other
machine that is asked to share the job is called the
client machine.
●To use the tandem copy function, the tandem
settings must be configured in the administrator
settings. (See page 14 of the "Administrator settings
100 sets of
copies
50 sets of
copies
50 sets of
copies
guide")
●When configuring the tandem settings in the server
machine, the IP address of the client machine must
be entered. For the port number, it is best to use the
initial setting (50001). Unless you experience
difficulty with this setting, do not change it. The
tandem settings should be configured by your
network administrator. If the server and client
machines will alternate server and client roles, the IP
address of the server machine must also be entered
in the client machine.The same port number can be
set in both machines.
Set the number of copies with the numeric
keys.
3
To display the special modes screen...
Up to 999 copies can be
set. When the [START]
key is pressed, the
copies will automatically
be divided between the
Touch the [TANDEM COPY] key on the
1
special modes screen.
OK
server
machines. If an odd
and
client
The [TANDEM COPY]
key will be highlighted to
LOGOUT
1/3
DUAL PAGE
COPY
ERASE
number of copies is set, the server machine will
make the extra set.
indicate that the function
is turned on, and the
TANDEM
COPY
JOB
BUILD
tandem copy icon (
)
will appear in the upper
left of the screen.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the clear key and set the correct number of
copies.
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes
screen.
2
Place the original in the document feeder
You will return to the
main screen of copy
mode.
4
OK
or on the document glass. (page 4-3)
1/3
DUAL PAGE
COPY
RASE
JOB
BUILD
TANDEM
COPY
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
5 Press the [START] key.
To cancel the tandem copy function, touch the
[TANDEM COPY] key on the special modes screen
(step 1). The highlighted display will be cancelled.
NOTES
● To perform tandem copying, the server machine
and client machine must meet certain conditions.
After the [START] key is pressed on the server
machine, the server machine verifies that the
conditions have been met. If the conditions have
not been met, tandem copying does not begin
and "TANDEM OUTPUT IS NOT ALLOWED.
OUTPUT ALL SETS USING MASTER
MACHINE?" appears in the display. To have the
server machine make all the copies, touch the
[OK] key. To cancel the job, touch the [CANCEL]
key.
• As an example, the following conditions must
be met when a staple finisher is installed on the
server machine and not on the client machine:
(1) If tandem copying is executed for a two-
sided copy job with the number of copies
set to 999 and "Non-staple" is selected,
tandem copying will take place.
5
(2) If tandem copying is executed for a two-
sided copy job with the number of copies
set to 999 and "Staple" is selected,
tandem copying will not take place
because the client machine does not have
a finisher.
● After the [START] key is pressed, if the client
machine cannot print because it is out of paper or
other reason, the server machine will print its half
of the job. The other half of the job will be stored in
the client machine and the job will be printed when
the client machine is able to print.
● If auditing mode is enabled on both the server and
client machines, the same account number must
be entered on both machines.
● If auditing mode is enabled on the client machine
but not on the server machine, tandem copying
cannot be performed.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Covers/inserts
A different type of paper can be inserted in positions corresponding to front and back covers of a copy job when the
automatic document feeding function is used. A different type of paper can also be automatically added as an insert
at specified pages.
As an example, tabbed paper can be added as inserts at the beginning of chapters or at other pages to create an
indexed document.
● Covers/inserts can be disabled in the administrator settings (page 11 of the administrator settings guide).
Example of adding covers
Example of adding inserts
Originals
Originals
Back cover
Front cover
Inserts
Example of adding covers and inserts
Originals
About the explanations of covers and
inserts
There are various ways of using covers and inserts.
To keep the explanations simple, covers and inserts
are explained separately. The procedure for
procedure for adding inserts is explained on page 5-
14. After reading these explanations, see the
examples of using covers and inserts on pages 5-
Back
cover
Front
cover
Inserts
■ Preparations for using covers and inserts
● Load the cover/insert paper in the tray before using the cover/insert function.
● Use the same size of paper for the covers/inserts as for the copies. (For the procedures for loading paper, see
● Before selecting the cover/insert function, place the originals in the document feeder, select one-sided or two-
sided copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings as explained on pages 4-
7 to 4-10. When these settings have been completed, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts on the
following page.
● The original must be scanned from the document feeder. The document glass cannot be used.
● Tabbed paper can be used for cover/ inserts, however, two-sided copying cannot be performed on the tabbed
paper. Tabbed paper can be fed from the bypass tray, tray 3, and the inserter. The other trays cannot be used.
● Up to 100 covers/inserts can be inserted. Two covers/inserts cannot be inserted between the same pages.
● Pamphlet copying cannot be used in combination with covers/inserts.
● When performing two-sided copying of two-sided originals, an insert cannot be added between the front and
back sides of an original page.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Procedure for inserting front and back cover paper
The paper for the front cover is called the front cover paper ("FRONT COVER" in the touch panel). The paper
for the back cover is called the back cover paper ("BACK COVER" in the touch panel).
Set the insertion conditions for the front
5
To display the special modes screen...
cover paper.
PLEASE SET UP A FRONT COVER.
0
CANCEL
OK
FRONT COVER SETTING
PRINT ON FRONT COVER
PAPER TRAY
Touch the [COVERS/INSERTS] key in the
special modes screen (2nd screen).
1
BYPASS
TRAY
1-SIDED
2-SIDED
YES
NO
A4
PLAIN
SPECIAL MODES
TRANSPARENCY
INSERTS
COVERS/INSERTS
(Y)
(Z)
(X)
1
2
Select whether or not the front cover paper is to be
copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or [NO]).
Select whether one-sided copying or two-sided
copying is to be performed on the front cover
paper with the (Y) keys. This selection is only
possible when the [YES] key of (X) has been
selected. (The one-sided/two-sided selection
made here only applies to the front cover paper.
When the back cover paper is selected, the
selection only applies to the back cover paper.)
The (Z) key shows the tray selected for the front
cover paper in step 3 and the paper size and
type.
BOOK COPY
TAB COPY
2 Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.
CANCEL
OK
COVERS/INSERTS
INSERTION
TYPE A SETTING
PAPER TRAY
SETTINGS
FRONT COVER
INSERTION
SETTINGS
INSERTION
TYPE B SETTING
PAGE LAYOUT
BACK COVER
3
5
Select the tray used for the front cover
paper.
3
Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 5.
You will return to the screen of step 2.
When you return to the screen of step 2, the
[FRONT COVER] key will be highlighted.
OK
PAPER TRAY SETTINGS
6
7
INSERTION
TYPE A
INSERTION
TYPE B
FRONT COVER
BACK COVER
BYPASS
TRAY
BYPASS
TRAY
BYPASS
TRAY
BYPASS
TRAY
A4
A4
A4
A4
PLAIN
PLAIN
PLAIN
PLAIN
To insert back cover paper, repeat steps 2
through 6, using the [BACK COVER] key
instead of the [FRONT COVER] key.
(X)
(Y)
1
The tray name (tray position) selected for the
front cover paper and the paper size and type
are shown in (X). If the tray in which you
loaded paper for the front cover is shown, touch
the [OK] key. You will return to the screen of step
2.
If the correct tray for the cover sheet paper does
not appear in (X), touch the (Y) key. The tray
selection screen will appear. Select the tray in
which you loaded paper for the front cover. You
will return to the screen of above.
PLEASE SET UP COVERS/INSERTS.
0
OK
OK
SPECIAL MODES
COVERS/INSERTS
FRONT COVER
CANCEL
INSERTION
TYPE A SETTINGS
PAPER TRAY
SETTINGS
INSERTION
SETTINGS
INSERTION
BACK COVER
PAGE LAYOUT
TYPE B SETTINGS
2
Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key in the
screen of step 7 to display a list of the
selected settings (page 5-16).
To edit or delete a cover/insert, follow
cover/insert settings, touch the upper
[OK] key in the screen of step 7.
8
Touch the [FRONT COVER] key in the
screen of step 2.
4
9 Press the [START] key.
To cancel covers/inserts settings...
Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 2.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Procedure for adding inserts
You can have different paper automatically inserted as an insert at a specified pages. Two types of insert paper
can be used. These are specified with the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key and [INSERTION TYPE B
SETTING] in the touch panel. Tabbed paper can be used as an insert.
Set the insertion conditions for insertion
5
To display the special modes screen...
type A .
CANCEL
OK
INSERTION TYPE A SETTING
1-SIDED
2-SIDED
PAPER TRAY
PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS
BYPASS
TRAY
YES
NO
Touch the [COVERS/INSERTS] key in the
special modes screen (2nd screen).
A4
1
TAB COPY
PLAIN
SPECIAL MODES
(Y)
(Z)
(X)
TRANSPARENCY
INSERTS
COVERS/INSERTS
1
2
Select whether or not insertion type A paper is
to be copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or
[NO]).
BOOK COPY
TAB COPY
Select whether one-sided copying or two-sided
copying is to be performed on insertion type A
with the (Y) keys. This selection is only possible
when the [YES] key of (X) has been selected.
(The one-sided/two-sided selection made here
only applies to insertion type A paper. When
insertion type B is selected, the selection only
applies to insertion type B paper.)
The (Z) key shows the tray selected for insertion
type A in step 3 and the paper size and type.
If a paper tray with tabbed paper is selected in the
screen of step 3, you can touch the [TAB COPY]
key. This allows you to select the tab width. Two-
sided copying is not possible on tabbed paper.
2 Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.
CANCEL
OK
COVERS/INSERTS
INSERTION
TYPE A SETTING
PAPER TRAY
SETTINGS
FRONT COVER
INSERTION
SETTINGS
3
4
INSERTION
TYPE B SETTING
PAGE LAYOUT
BACK COVER
3 Select the tray used for insertion type A.
OK
PAPER TRAY SETTINGS
INSERTION
TYPE A
INSERTION
TYPE B
Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 5.
You will return to the screen of step 2.
When you return to the screen of step 2, the
[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key will be
highlighted.
FRONT COVER
BACK COVER
6
7
BYPASS
TRAY
BYPASS
TRAY
BYPASS
TRAY
BYPASS
TRAY
A4
A4
A4
A4
PLAIN
PLAIN
PLAIN
PLAIN
(X)
(Y)
If you wish to insert a different paper with
the [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key,
repeat steps 2 through 6. Use the
[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key instead
of the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key,
and the [INSERTION TYPE B] key instead
of the [INSERTION TYPE A] key.
1
2
The tray name (tray position) selected for
insertion type A and the paper size and type are
shown in (X). If the tray in which you loaded
paper for insertion type A is shown, touch the
[OK] key. You will return to the screen of step 2.
If the correct tray for insertion type A does not
appear in (X), touch the (Y) key. The tray
selection screen will appear. Select the tray in
which you loaded paper for insertion type A. You
will return to the screen of step 2.
OK
OK
CANCEL
TS
INSERTION
PAPER TRAY
SETTINGS
TYPE A SETTING
INSERTION
SETTINGS
INSERTION
PAGE LAYOUT
TYPE B SETTING
Touch the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING]
key in the screen of step 2
4
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Touch the [INSERTION SETTINGS] key to
specify the pages where you wish to insert
the insert papers of [INSERTION TYPE A
If you wish to insert a different paper with
the [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key,
repeat steps 2 through 6. Use the
[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key instead
of the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key,
and the [INSERTION TYPE B] key instead
of the [INSERTION TYPE A] key.
8
11
12
SETTING] and [INSERTION TYPE
B
SETTING].
CANCE
RTION
SETTING
OK
INSERTION
SETTINGS
OK
CANCEL
TS
TION
INSERTION
PAPER TRAY
SETTINGS
SETTING
TYPE A SETTING
INSERTION
SETTINGS
INSERTION
PAGE LAYOUT
TYPE B SETTING
Touch the [INSERTION TYPE A] key or the
[INSERTION TYPE B] key, enter the page
number where you wish to insert the insert
paper with the numeric keys, and then
touch the [ENTER] key.
9
Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key in the
screen of step 11 to display a list of the
selected settings (page 5-16).
To edit or delete a cover/insert, follow
cover/insert settings, touch the upper
[OK] key in the screen of step 11.
INPUT THE PAGE NUMBER AND
PRESS [ENTER]. USE [C] KEY TO AMEND.
OK
INSERTION SETTINGS
INSERTION PAGE
INSERTION
TYPE B
INSERTION
TYPE A
INSERTION
TOTAL:0
3
13Press the [START] key.
BYPASS
TRAY
BYPASS
TRAY
A4
A4
ENTER
PLAIN
PLAIN
To cancel covers/inserts settings...
Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 2.
(X)
(Y)
(Z)
1
(X) shows the total number of inserts. Up to 100
inserts can be added. When inserting multiple
inserts, touch the [ENTER] key after each entry
of an insertion page number (insertion position)
with the numeric keys.
5
2
3
4
(Y) shows the tray selected in step 3 for
[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] and the paper
size and type.
(Z) shows the tray selected in step 3 for
[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] and the paper
size and type.
When the [INSERTION TYPE A] key is
highlighted, the insert settings apply to
[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING]. When the
[INSERTION TYPE B] key is highlighted, the
insert settings apply to [INSERTION TYPE B
SETTING].
Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 9.
You will return to the screen of step 2.
When you return to the screen of step 2, the
[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key will be
highlighted.
10
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Checking, editing, and deleting cover/insert pages
The [PAGE LAYOUT] key appears after covers/inserts settings are configured (the settings of step 1 through
The [PAGE LAYOUT] key is used for the following:
● To display the status of covers/inserts pages
● To edit, delete, or add inserted pages
3
To edit or delete an inserted page, touch the key
To display the [PAGE LAYOUT] key...
Configure the settings in step 1 through step 7
of the page you wish to edit or delete in the page
layout screen. When the key is touched, the
[CANCEL], [DELETE], and [AMEND] keys
appear.
1 Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key.
AMEND THE INSERTION?
OK
CANCEL
DELETE
AMEND
OK
CANCEL
TS
INSERTION
TYPE A SETTING
PAPER TRAY
SETTINGS
INSERTION
SETTINGS
INSERTION
TYPE B SETTING
PAGE LAYOUT
●To cancel, touch the [CANCEL] key.
●To delete an inserted page, touch the
[DELETE] key.
2 The set covers/inserts pages are shown.
OK
PAGE LAYOUT
●To edit an inserted page, touch the [AMEND]
screen of step 5 on page 5-14 appears. Edit
the page as explained in step 5 on page 5-13
or step 5 on page 5-14.
1/2
INSERTION
TYPE A
12/-
INSERTION
TYPE A
<4
INSERTION
TYPE B
7/8
FRONT COVER
1
2
If there are multiple screens, touch the
key to change screens.
or
When you have finished checking the
pages, touch the [OK] key.
3
Displayed icons:
: Front side copy only
: Back side copy only
: Two-sided copy
OK
: No copying
For inserts, the insertion page also appears.
INSERTION
TYPE B
"
" represents a page number.
/- : Front side copy only at page
/
: Two-sided copy at page
-/ : Back side copy only at page
: Insert non-copied insert at page
/
<
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Examples of covers and inserts
The relations between the originals and finished copies when covers or inserts are inserted are shown on the
following pages.
Covers
●One-sided copying of one-sided originals
●Two-sided copying of one-sided originals
●One-sided copying of two-sided originals
●Two-sided copying of two-sided originals
Inserts
●One-sided copying of one-sided originals
●Two-sided copying of one-sided originals
●One-sided copying of two-sided originals
●Two-sided copying of two-sided originals
■ Symbols used for covers and inserts
The following symbols are used to make the explanations easier to understand.
The numbers that appear indicate relations between the originals and copies, and will vary depending on the
settings.
Icon
Icon
Symbol
Meaning
appearing
in display
Symbol
Meaning
appearing
in display
Front cover when not
copied on.
Insert when not copied on.
5
Front cover after one-sided
copying.
Insert after one-sided
copying.
1
1
1
3
3
3
1
Front cover after two-sided
copying. (One page is not
copied on.)
Insert after one-sided
copying. (One page is not
copied on.)
Front cover after two-sided
copying.
Insert
after
two-sided
copying.
Back cover when not
copied on.
One-sided
original
or
output page of regular one-
sided copying
Back cover after one-sided
Two-sided
output page of regular two-
sided copying.
original
or
1
6
5
copying
original.
of
one-sided
Back cover after two-sided
copying. (One page is not
copied on.)
One-sided
output page of regular one-
sided copying.
original
or
Back cover after two-sided
copying.
One-sided
output page of regular one-
sided copying.
original
or
5
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Covers (One-sided copying of one-sided originals)
One-sided copies are made of the following one-sided originals.
1st page
2nd page
3rd page
4th page
5th page
6th page
1
2
3
4
5
6
Copying on cover
Resulting copies
Front cover
Back cover
1
2
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
2
3
4
2
2
3
3
4
4
3
4
5
3
3
4
4
5
5
4
5
6
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
No copying
No copying
1
1
One-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
Two-sided
copying
5
5
One-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
Two-sided
copying
1
1
1
1
One-sided
copying
One-sided
copying
One-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
One-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Covers (Two-sided copying of one-sided originals)
Two-sided copies are made of the following one-sided originals.
1st page
2nd page
3rd page
4th page
5th page
6th page
1
2
3
4
5
6
Copying on cover
Resulting copies
Front cover
Back cover
1
2
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
4
5
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
No copying
No copying
1
1
6
One-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
Two-sided
copying
5
5
5
One-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
Two-sided
copying
1
1
1
1
One-sided
copying
One-sided
copying
5
One-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
One-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Covers (One-sided copying of Two-sided originals)
One-sided copies are made of the following two-sided originals.
1st page
2nd page
3rd page
1
3
5
Copying on cover
Resulting copies
Front cover
Back cover
1
2
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
2
3
4
2
2
3
3
4
4
3
4
5
3
3
4
4
5
5
4
5
6
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
No copying
No copying
1
1
One-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
Two-sided
copying
5
5
One-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
Two-sided
copying
1
1
1
1
One-sided
copying
One-sided
copying
One-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
One-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Covers (Two-sided copying of two-sided originals)
Two-sided copies are made of the following two-sided originals.
1st page
2nd page
3rd page
1
3
5
Copying on cover
Resulting copies
Front cover
Back cover
1
3
3
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
3
3
5
No copying
No copying
1
1
One-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
Two-sided
copying
One-sided
copying
5
No copying
No copying
5
Two-sided
copying
1
1
1
1
One-sided
copying
One-sided
copying
5
One-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
One-sided
copying
5
Two-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Inserts (One-sided copying of one-sided originals)
One-sided and two-sided copying is performed using the following one-sided originals. The insert is added as
the third page.
1st page
2nd page
3rd page
4th page
5th page
6th page
1
2
3
4
5
6
Copying on
insert
Resulting copies
(two-sided copying)
Resulting copies (one-sided copying)
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
4
5
4
5
6
5
6
1
1
1
3
5
6
No copying
3
3
6
3
3
4
5
One-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
■ Inserts (One-sided copying of two-sided originals)
One-sided and two-sided copying is performed using the following two-sided originals.
1st page
2nd page
3rd page
1
3
5
Copying on
insert
Resulting copies
(two-sided copying)
Resulting copies (one-sided copying)
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
4
5
4
5
6
5
6
1
1
1
3
5
No copying
3
3
6
3
3
5
5
One-sided
copying
Two-sided
copying
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Transparency film with insert sheets
When copying onto transparency film, blank insert sheets can be placed between transparent sheets.
Example: Inserting insert sheets between transparencies
●
This function only operates in "one-sided to one-
sided" and "two-sided to one-sided" modes.
● Multiple copies cannot be selected in this mode.
Originals (1-sided)
●
The inserts are inserted under each transparency
as shown at left.
●
Select insert paper that is the same size as the
transparencies.
Originals (2-sided)
● When feeding insert paper from an inserter,
copying on the insert paper is not possible.
● Transparencies can be fed from the bypass tray
or tray 3.
Insert sheets
Two-sided originals are
only supported when
Inserts can also be
copied on.
●
If the transparencies are loaded in tray 3, be sure
to set the paper size and paper type as explained
automatic
document
feeding is used.
If the transparencies are loaded in tray 3, steps
1 to 5 below are not necessary.
4 Touch the [OK] key.
TYPE
OK
TYPE/SIZE SETTING
SIZE
Load transparency film into the bypass
tray.
1
AUTO-INCH
/
8
2X11
1
2
AUTO-AB
A4,B5
Remove any paper
already in the bypass
tray before loading the
transparency film. (To
load paper in the bypass
2-11.)
SIZE INPUT
NON STANDARD SIZE
2/2
If the paper size was changed from an inch size to
an AB size, or from an AB size to an inch size, be
sure to set the paper type and size as explained on
page 2-15.
5
5 Select the bypass tray.
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key in the
main screen and select the bypass tray
paper type in the paper setting screen
(touch (X) below).
0
AUTO
ORIGINAL
A4
AUTO
N
PLAIN
FOR COPY.
EXPOSURE
0
Y
N
5. A4
PLAIN
AUTO
PAPER SELECT
ORIGINAL
2. B5
PLAIN
A4
AUTO
EXPOSURE
100%
PLAIN
COPY RATIO
HEAVY PAPER
PLAIN
5. A
PLAIN
PAPER SELECT
100%
COPY RATIO
To display the special modes screen...
(X)
3 Touch the [TRANSPARENCY] key.
Touch the [TRANSPARENCY INSERTS]
key in the special modes screen (2nd
screen).
6
TYPE.
LETTER HEAD
PRE-PUNCHED
COLOUR
HEAVY PAPER
The Transparency inserts
LABELS
SPECIAL MODES
setting screen will appear.
The transparency inserts
TRANSPARENCY
TRANSPARENCY
INSERTS
COVERS/INSERTS
icon (
, etc.) will also
appear in the upper left
corner of the screen to
indicate that the function
is turned on.
BOOK COPY
TAB COPY
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Set the insertion conditions for the insert
paper.
Touch the outer [OK] key in the screen of
step 7.
7
8
OK
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
CANCEL
OK
PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS
YES NO
INSERTION SHEET
TRAY5
NOTE
If insert paper is fed from an inserter, the output will
be delivered to the finisher (or saddle stitch finisher).
A4
PLAIN
(X)
(Y)
About the steps that follow
If an automatic document feeder is being used,
see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document
glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-
13.
1
2
Select whether or not the insert paper will be
copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or [NO]). If
[YES] is selected, insert paper cannot be fed
from an inserter.
To cancel the Transparency film with insert sheets
function, touch the [CANCEL] key on the
Transparency film with insert sheets setting screen.
The (Y) key shows the tray selected for the insert
paper and the paper size and type. To select a
different tray, touch this key to display the tray
selection screen and select the tray that has the
insert paper.
Multi shot
Multiple original pages can be copied onto one sheet of copy paper in a uniform layout. Select 2in1 to copy two
original pages onto one sheet, or 4in1 to copy four original pages onto one sheet. This function is convenient when
you wish to present multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document.
[Example] Copying 4 original pages onto one sheet of paper
(Page number : 4in1, layout : left top : right top (see the next page))
● When using the multi shot function, place the
One-sided copies from
one-sided originals
originals, select the desired paper size, and
select the copying mode before selecting the
multi shot function on the special modes screen.
● When using the multi shot function, the
appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set
based on the original size, paper size, and the
number of originals to be copied onto one sheet.
The minimum reduction ratio is 25%. The
original size, copy paper size, and selected
Copies
number of original pages may require that the
One-sided copies from
ratio be less than 25%. As copying will take
place at 25% in this case, part of the original
images may be cut off.
two-sided originals
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Touch the [OK] key (inside [OK] key) on
the multi shot setting screen.
You will return to the special modes screen.
To display the special modes screen...
4
5
Touch the [OK] key in the special modes
screen.
Touch the [MULTI SHOT] key in the special
modes screen (2nd screen).
1
2
The MULTI SHOT setting
screen will appear.
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
TRANSPARENCY
MULTI SHOT
A multi shot icon (
,
INSERTS
etc.) will also appear in
the upper left of the
screen to indicate that
the function is turned on.
About the steps that follow
TAB COPY
CARD SHOT
If an automatic document feeder is being used, see
Select the number of images to be copied
onto one sheet of copy paper.
To cancel the multi shot function, touch the [CANCEL]
key in the multi shot setting screen (the screen of step
2).
If
orientation of the copy
paper and the
needed,
the
SPECIAL MODES
MULTI SHOT
2in1
4in1
orientation of the images
will be rotated.
3 Select the layout.
OK
5
Select the order in which
the originals will be
arranged on the copy.
CANCEL
OK
LAYOUT
Shot number
2in1
Layout
4in1
The arrows in the above diagram indicate the
directions in which the images are arranged.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Book copy
This function is convenient when you wish to compile copies of books or other bound originals into an attractive
pamphlet format. The two pages of the open book are scanned as a set, and two pages each are copied onto the
front and back sides of the copy paper (four pages are copied onto one sheet of copy paper). This allows the copies
to be folded down the centre and made into a pamphlet.
[Example] Book copying an 8-page pamphlet
● Scan the originals from the first page to the last
page. The order of copying will be automatically
adjusted by the machine.
Originals
Finished copies are
folded in two.
Left binding
● Either left binding (right to left turning) or right
binding (left to right turning) can be selected.
●
Four originals will be copied onto one sheet.
Blank pages may be automatically produced at
the end depending on the number of the originals.
First page
First page
● If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, book copy
can be used in combination with the pamphlet
function to staple and fold the copies at the
centreline.
Right binding
First page
First page
Touch the [OK] key in the special modes
screen.
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
To display the special modes screen...
4
5
Place the originals on the document glass.
Touch the [BOOK COPY] key in the special
modes screen (2nd screen).
1
Scan the original pages in
the following order:
Opened front and back
cover
Opened inside of front
cover and 1st page
Opened 2nd and 3rd
page
The
BOOK
COPY
SPECIAL MODES
setting
screen
will
TRANSPARENCY
INSERTS
COVERS/INSERTS
appear. The book copy
icon ( , etc.) will also
appear in the upper left
corner of the screen to
indicate that the function
is turned on.
BOOK COPY
TAB COPY
Opened last page and
inside of back cover
Select whether the book opens to the left or
to the right, and touch the [OK] key in the
book copy setting screen.
2
Make sure that the desired paper size has
been selected.
6
If the desired paper size
You will return to the
special modes screen.
RIGHT
BINDING
LEFT
BINDING
is not selected, select
the desired size.
AUTO A3
PAPER SELECT
CO
SET
100%
Select the number of copies and any other
desired copy settings, and then press the
[START] key.
7
8
3 Select any desired cover settings.
CANCEL
OK
If you wish to use a
different type of paper for
the cover, perform steps
Place the next two pages and press the
[START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned, and then touch the [READ-
END] key.
RIGHT
NG
BINDING
COVER
SETTING
If you do not wish to use
a different type of paper,
continue from step 4.
When book copy is selected, two-sided
copying is automatically selected.
To cancel the book copy function, touch the [CANCEL] key
in the book copy setting screen (the screen of step 2).
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Tab copy
Copying is possible on the tabs of tabbed paper. Prepare appropriate originals for the tab captions.
[Example]
Original
Tabbed paper
Copy
Area A
Area B
Tab width
A4 : Maximum of 20 mm
(8-1/2" x 11" : Maximum of 5/8")
●The tab caption is shifted by the amount of the tab width setting, so keep areas A and B blank.
Relations between originals and tabbed paper
Left binding
Right binding
Right binding
(normal top-bottom)
(Inverted top-bottom)
(Inverted top-bottom)
5
Prepare
originals
these
(Normal orderA-E)
(Reverse orderE-A)
(Normal orderA-E)
Leading edge
of original
Originals placed
face up in the
document feeder
Leading edge
of original
Originals
Leading edge
of original
(Normal orderA-E)
(Normal orderA-E)
(Reverse orderE-A)
Originals placed
on the document
glass
(Reverse
orderE-A)
(Normal
orderA-E)
(Normal
order A-E)
Load
tabbed
1
Tabbed
paper
paper in the
bypass tray or
tray 3
2
3
4
5
Feeding
direction
Feeding
direction
Feeding
direction
Result
(Top-bottom
reversed)
(Top-bottom
normal)
(Top-bottom
reversed)
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Select "TAB PAPER" for the paper type
setting.
5
To display the special modes screen...
The paper type setting is explained in “Setting the
If you are using tray 3, see “Setting the paper size
Touch the [TAB COPY] key in the special
modes screen (2nd screen).
1
About the steps that follow
SPECIAL MODES
The TAB COPY setting
If an automatic document feeder is being used,
screen will appear. A
tab copy icon ( ) will
TRANSPARENCY
INSERTS
COVERS/INSERTS
also appear in the
BOOK COPY
TAB COPY
upper left corner of the
screen to indicate that
the function is turned
on.
When performing tab copying with a right
binding
If you are using left-binding tabbed paper for a right
binding, either stack the sheets in reverse order or
scan the originals in reverse order.(See the table on
the previous page.)
If necessary, set the image shift width (tab)
and touch the [OK] key.
2
3
Set the image shift
OK
width (tab) with the
CANCEL
OK
and
keys.
To cancel the tab copy function, touch the [CANCEL]
key in the tab copy setting screen (the screen of step
2).
IMAGE SHIFT
The width can be set
from 0 to 20 mm (0 to
5/8") in increments of
1 mm (1/8").
(0 20)
mm
10
Touch the [OK] key in the special modes
screen.
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
4 Load tabbed paper in the bypass tray.
Place the tabbed paper
so that the edges with
the tabs are the trailing
edge.
To use tab paper in tray
3, set the paper type
setting of tray 3 to "TAB
PAPER" in the tray
settings of the system
To load tabbed paper in
NOTE
The width of the tabbed paper can be up to A4 width
(210 mm) + 20 mm (or 8-1/2" x 11" width (8-1/2") +
5/8").
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Card shot
When copying a card, this function allows you to combine the front and back sides on a single sheet of paper.
● Copying is only possible on standard size paper.
● A copy ratio cannot be selected when using this
function.
Original
CARD
Copy
● The image cannot be rotated when using this
function.
CARD
Front of
card
CARD
Back of
card
Example:
Portrait
A4 (8-1/2") size
Example:
Landscape
A4 (8-1/2") size
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then
select the desired paper size.
Enter the X dimension (width) and Y
dimension (length) of the original with the
keys.
1
3
The selected paper size
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.
key is highlighted and
the paper selection
screen closes.
CANCEL
OK
1. A4
PLAIN
2. B5
PLAIN
A4
PLAIN
SIZE RESET
HEAVY PAPER
PLAIN
5. A4
PLAIN
3. A4
4. A3
5
FIT TO
PAGE
NOTE
If paper of the desired size is not loaded in any tray,
load paper of the required size in a paper tray or the
●X (width) is initially selected. Enter X and then
touch the Y ( ) key to enter Y.
●To return the X and Y values to the initial
settings configured in the administrator
settings, touch the [SIZE RESET] key. (See
"CARD SHOT SETTINGS" on page 16 of the
administrator settings guide.)
●To have the images enlarged or reduced by a
suitable ratio based on the entered original
size so that the front and back sides fit into the
selected paper size, touch the [FIT TO PAGE]
key.
To display the special modes screen...
Touch the [CARD SHOT] key in the special
modes screen (2nd screen).
2
The CARD SHOT
setting screen will
appear. A card shot
icon ( , etc.) will also
appear in the upper left
corner of the screen to
TRANSPARENCY
INSERTS
MULTI SHOT
CARD SHOT
TAB COPY
indicate
that
the
function is turned on.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Place the back side of the original face
down on the document glass (see step 5).
4 Touch the outer [OK] key.
8
You will return to the
OK
main screen of copy
mode.
CANCEL
9 Press the [START] key.
SIZE RESET
The back side of the
card is scanned.
FIT TO
PAGE
5 Place the original on the document glass.
Place the front side of
the original face down
10Touch the [READ-END] key.
and
close
the
document cover.
NOTE
The original must be placed on the document glass.
The document feeder (automatic document feeding
function) cannot be used.
Follow steps 4 through 5 of "Copying from
6
To cancel the card shot function, touch the
[CANCEL] key in the card shot setting screen (the
screen of step 4).
7 Press the [START] key.
The front side of the
card is scanned.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Mirror image
This function is used to print a mirror image of the original. The images will be inverted in the right to left direction
on the copies.
Original
Copy
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes
screen.
To display the special modes screen...
2
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
Touch the [MIRROR IMAGE] key in the
special modes screen (3rd screen).
The [MIRROR IMAGE]
1
About the steps that follow
If an automatic document feeder is being used,
see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document
glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-
13.
key will be highlighted to
ECIAL MODES
indicate that the function
is turned on, and the
MIRROR
IMAGE
B/W
REVERSE
mirror image icon (
)
will appear in the upper
left of the screen.
To cancel the mirror image function, touch the
[MIRROR IMAGE] key in the special modes screen
(the screen of step 1).
5
B/W reverse
Black and white are reversed in the copy to create a negative image.
NOTES
● When this function is selected, the exposure mode setting (page 4-14) automatically changes to "Text".
● Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be printed with black/white reverse
Original
B/W reverse copy
Touch the [OK] key in the special modes
screen.
2
To display the special modes screen...
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
Touch the [B/W REVERSE] key in the
special modes screen (3rd screen).
The [B/W REVERSE]
About the steps that follow
1
If an automatic document feeder is being used,
key will be highlighted to
ECIAL MODES
indicate that the function
is turned on, and the
B/W
REVERSE
MIRROR
IMAGE
mirror image icon (
will appear in the upper
left of the screen.
)
To cancel the B/W reverse function, touch the [B/W
REVERSE] key in the special modes screen (the
screen of step 1).
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Print menu
The date, a stamp, page numbers, and entered text can be printed on copies. Four selections are available for the
PRINT MENU:
• Date print (page 5-35)
• Stamp (page 5-36)
This prints the date on the paper.
[Example] Printing 2010/APR/4 in the upper right-
hand corner of the paper
Print a message such as "CONFIDENTIAL" in
reverse text on the paper.
[Example] Printing "CONFIDENTIAL" in the upper
right-hand corner of the paper
2010/APR/4
CONFIDENTIAL
The format of the date and the character that
separates the year, month, and day can be changed.
One of 12 stamps can be selected.
• Page numbering (page 5-37)
Page numbers can be printed on copies.
[Example] Printing page numbers in the bottom right-
hand corner of the paper
• Text (page 5-41)
Entered text can be printed.
[Example] Printing "Meeting" in the upper left-hand
corner of the paper
Meeting
Up to 50 characters can be printed. You can store up
to 30 sequences of frequently used text.
The format of the page number can be changed.
Six printing positions are available: left, centre, or right of the top or bottom of the page.
Each printing position is divided into an area for the date, page number, and text (A below), and an area for the stamp
(B below).
Top centre
Printing
area
Maximum number of
settings
Print menu
Top left
Top right
DATE
A
B
One position only
6 positions
STAMP
PAGE
NUMBERING
A
A
One position only
6 positions
TEXT
Bottom left
Bottom right
Bottom centre
NOTES
● A part that overlaps the printed text will not be copied.
● If the set text content overlaps the print content of another position, the central print content will be moved to the
bottom, the content on the left will be next, and the content on the right will be placed on top in that order such
that only the content visible at the top is printed. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed.
● The printed text will be printed at the set size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size.
● The printed text will also be printed at the set density regardless of the copy exposure.
● Some copy paper sizes may cause the printed contents to be cut off or the print position to shift.
● If a copy job with a print menu setting is saved using the document filing function, the print menu setting will not
be saved. If you wish to print a file saved in copy mode and use a print menu setting, use the special modes in
the Job settings / print screen (or the document filing print screen in the Web page if the machine is connected
to a network) to select the print menu setting. (A print menu setting cannot be selected when printing a file saved
in a mode other than copy mode.)
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Common operation procedure for using the print menu
To select print menu settings at another
print position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
4
To display the special modes screen...
See "General procedure for using special functions" on
page 5-2.
NOTES
● If the [DATE], [PAGE NUMBERING], or [TEXT] key
is touched when other than a "STAMP" print menu
setting has been selected for the print position
selected in step 2, a message will appear. To
overwrite the previously set print content of the
print menu that you touched, touch the [YES] key.
To keep the previous settings, touch the [NO] key.
Touch the [PRINT MENU] key in the special
modes screen (3rd screen).
1
The print menu setting
screen will appear. The
print menu icon ( ) will
also appear in the upper
left corner of the screen
to indicate that the
function is turned on.
●
The "DATE" and "PAGE NUMBERING" cannot be set
in multiple positions. If either of these keys is touched
when a date or page numbering setting has already
been configured, a message will appear asking you if
you wish to move the print settings to the position that
you selected in step 2. To move the print settings,
touch the [YES] key. Otherwise touch the [NO] key.
B/W
REVERSE
PRINT MENU
2 Select the print position.
key.
5 Touch the
Six
positions
are
SPECIAL MODES
LAYOUT
CANCEL
OK
available: left, centre,
or right of the top or
bottom of the page.
The touched key is
highlighted.
LAYOU
1/2
PRINT MENU
DATE
STAMP
PAGE
NUMBERING
TEXT
N
The keys indicating the print position appear as
follows depending on the state of the setting:
5
To specify the orientation of the original,
touch the [ORIGINAL ORIENTATION] key.
6
7
Not selected, print menu setting has not
been selected.
OK
SPECIAL MODES
LAYOUT
OK
2/2
CANCEL
PRINT MENU
ORIGINAL ORIENTATION
2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE
Selected during selection of the print
menu setting.
PRINT ON COVERS/INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS
Not selected, print menu setting has
already been selected.
If you placed a two-sided original, touch the
] key to specify the binding style (book or
[
The image displayed within each key varies
depending on the key position.
tablet). The icon of the selected binding style is
highlighted.
3 Select the print menu.
If you are adding covers or inserts, select
whether or not you wish to print on the
covers or inserts.
The settings screen of
OK
the
print
menu
LAYOUT
CANCEL
OK
OK
SPECIAL MODES
appears.
For information on
each of the print
1/2
LAYOUT
OK
2/2
CANCEL
DATE
STAMP
PRINT MENU
ORIGINAL ORIENTATION
2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE
PAGE
NUMBERING
TEXT
menus,
see
the
PRINT ON COVERS/INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS
settings of each.
If you do not wish to print on covers or inserts,
touch the checkbox to remove the checkmark.
●DATE (page 5-35) ● STAMP (page 5-36)
●PAGE NUMBERING (page 5-37) ● TEXT (page 5-
41)
NOTES
●
If you are not copying on covers or inserts, printing will
not take place on these even if a checkmark appears.
● A page number is never printed on covers or
inserts, regardless of the above setting.
● If covers/inserts have been disabled in the
administrator settings, the checkbox will be greyed
out to prevent selection.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Check the print layout if needed (page 5-
43).
8
NOTE
To cancel print menu...
Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 3.
To display the layout
OK
and print content of the
OK
LAYOUT
CANCEL
configured print menu,
touch the [LAYOUT]
key. The position can
2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE
2
be
changed
and
S WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS
settings cancelled if
needed.
Touch the [OK] key on the print menu
setting screen.
9
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes
screen.
10
About the steps that follow
If an automatic document feeder is being used, see
Printing in combination with other special functions
When a print menu is combined with one of the following special modes, printing will reflect the selected special
mode.
Special modes
Margin shift
Printing operation
Like the copy image, the printed contents are shifted in accordance with the set margin.
The print content is printed on each copy sheet.
Dual page copy
Pamphlet copy
Book copy
The print content is printed on each page of the "book".
Multi shot
Card shot
The print content is printed on each copy sheet.
Covers/inserts
In the print menu settings, specify whether or not the print content is printed on covers and inserts.
NOTE
When combined with "Erase", "Job build", "Mirror image", "B/W reverse", or "Tab copy", printing takes place
normally at the set position on the paper.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Printing the date on copies
The date can be printed on copies. Four selections each are available for the date format and the character that
separates the year, month, and day.
NOTE
Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common
operation procedure for using the print
menu" (page 5-33).
1
5 Select the pages to be printed on.
CANCEL OK
Select whether to print
on only the first page,
or all pages. The
FIRST PAGE
CURRENT SETTING
2010/APR/04
2 Touch the [DATE] key.
touched
highlighted.
key
is
ALL PAGES
OK
DATE CHANGE
LAYOUT
CANCEL
OK
1/2
DATE
STAMP
6 Touch the [OK] key.
PA
NUMBG
TEXT
CANCEL
OK
3 Select the date format.
FIRSGE
CURRENT SETTING
2010/APR/04
The selected date format
is highlighted.
DATE
ALL PAGES
DATE CHANGE
YYYY/MM/DD
MM/DD/YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
MM DD, YYYY
If you selected [YYYY/
MM/DD], [MM/DD/YYYY],
or [DD/MM/YYYY], you
can select the character
that separates the year,
5
Continue from step 4 of "Common
operation procedure for using the print
menu" (page 5-33).
7
month, and date. Select [/] (slash), [.] (period), [-]
(hyphen), or [ ] (space).
4 Check the date and format.
NOTE
To cancel a date print setting...
Touch the [CANCEL] key in the date selection screen.
(The screen of step 6.)
The date to be printed
CANCEL
OK
is
displayed
in
FIRST PAGE
CURRENT SETTING
2010/APR/04
"CURRENT SETTING"
in the selected format.
The date that appears
is the date set in the
machine. If you need to
ALL PAGES
DATE CHANGE
change the date, touch the [DATE CHANGE] key.
The following screen appears.
OK
DATE CHANGE
YEAR
2010
MONTH
04
DAY
04
Touch the key of the number (year, month, or day)
that needs to be changed, and then adjust the
number with the
or
key. When finished,
touch the [OK] key.
NOTE
If you select a non-existent date (for example, Feb. 30),
the [OK] key will grey out to prevent entry of the date.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Printing a stamp (reverse text) on copies
A message such as "CONFIDENTIAL" can be printed in reverse text on copies.
The following 12 messages are available.
CONFIDENTIAL
FOR YOUR INFO.
URGENT
PRIORITY
DO NOT COPY
DRAFT
PRELIMINARY
IMPORTANT
TOP SECRET
FINAL
COPY
PLEASE REPLY
You can select from three density levels for the background of the stamp.
Two selections are available for the size of the stamp.
NOTE
The text of the stamp cannot be edited.
Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common
operation procedure for using the print
menu" (page 5-33).
1
5 Select the desired stamp size.
"LARGER" is initially
selected. To make the
stamp smaller, touch
CANCEL
OK
FIRST PAGE
1
2
3
1/2
2 Touch the [STAMP] key.
EXPOSURE
the
SMALLER]
[LARGER/
key.
SIZE
ALL PAGES
LARGER
OK
"Smaller" is selected
when [SMALLER] is
highlighted.
SMALLER
LAYOUT
CANCEL
OK
1/2
DATE
STAMP
PAGE
NUMBERING
T
6 Select the pages to be printed on.
Select whether to print
on only the first page,
or all pages. The
CANCEL
OK
3 Select the stamp that you wish to print.
FIRST PAGE
1
2
3
1/2
EXPOSURE
touched
highlighted.
key
is
SIZE
The selected stamp is
ALL PAGES
STAMP
LARGER
highlighted.
desired stamp does not
appear, change
screens with the
or key.
If
the
SMALLER
1/2
CONFIDENTIAL
FOR YOUR INFO.
URGENT
PRIORITY
DO NOT COPY
DRAFT
7 Touch the [OK] key.
CANCEL
OK
4 Adjust the exposure as needed.
FIRST E
1
2
3
1/2
EXPOSURE
The density of the
background of the
SIZE
CANCEL
OK
ALL PAGES
LARGER
FIRST PAGE
1
2
3
1/2
stamp can be adjusted.
Touch the [EXPOSURE]
key to display the
following screen.
SMALLER
EXPOSURE
SE
ALL PAGES
LA
Continue from step 4 of "Common
operation procedure for using the print
menu" (page 5-33).
SMALLER
8
Touch the
darker
Touch the
lighter background (3
levels).
key for a
background.
key for a
EXPOSURE
2
NOTE
1
3
To cancel a stamp setting...
Touch the [CANCEL] key in the stamp selection
When finished, touch
the [OK] key.
screen. (The screen of step 7.)
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Printing the page number on copies
The page number can be printed on copies. One of 6 formats can be selected for the page number.
Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common
operation procedure for using the print
menu" (page 5-33).
If you need to change the starting or ending
number of page numbering, the first page
printed on, or the print settings for covers/
inserts, touch the [PAGE NUMBER] key.
1
4
2 Touch the [PAGE NUMBERING] key.
OK
CANCEL
TOTAL PAGE
AUTO
OK
LAYOUT
CANCEL
OK
MANUAL
1/2
DATE
STAMP
PAGE NUMBER
PAGE
NUMBERING
TEXT
5 Touch the [MANUAL] key.
3 Select the page number format.
PAGE NUMBER
FIRST NUMBER
1
LA
The selected format is
highlighted.
AUTO
PAGE NUMBERING
PAGE NUMBERING FORMAT
INTING STARTS FROM
1
MANUAL
(1),(2),(3)..
1,2,3..
-1-,-2-,-3-..
<1>,<2>,<3>..
P.1,P.2,P.3..
/5,2/5,3/5..
Enter settings for "FIRST NUMBER",
6
"LAST
NUMBER",
and
"PRINTING
STARTS FROM SHEET".
5
If you selected "1/5, 2/5, 3/5",
Touch each key so that
it is highlighted, and
then enter the number
with the numeric keys
(1 to 999).
"PAGE NUMBER/TOTAL PAGES" will be printed.
"AUTO" is initially selected for "TOTAL PAGE",
which means that the number of scanned original
pages is automatically used. If you need to enter
the total pages manually (for example, when a
large number of originals are scanned in batches),
touch the [MANUAL] key to display the total page
entry screen.
FIRST NUMBER
LAST NUMBER
AUTO
1
PRINTING STARROM SHEET
1
To return a number to
its initial value (FIRST
NUMBER: 1, LAST NUMBER: AUTO, PRINTING
STARTS FROM SHEET: 1), touch the [C] (clear)
key while the key of the number is highlighted. If
you enter the wrong number, press the [C] (clear)
key and enter the correct number.
CANCEL
OK
PAGE NUMBERING
PAGE NUMBERING FORMAT
OK
TOTAL PAGE
AUTO
(1),(2),(3)..
1,2,3..
TOTAL PAGE
30
-1-,-2-,-3-..
<1>,<2>,<3>..
P.1,P.2,P.3..
1/5,2/5,3/5..
NOTES
PAGE
MANUAL
● A last number smaller than the "FIRST NUMBER"
cannot be set.
● "LAST NUMBER" is initially set to "AUTO", which
means that the page number is printed on each
page through the final page in accordance with the
"FIRST NUMBER" and "PRINTING STARTS
FROM SHEET" settings.
● A number less than the total page number is set as
the last number, the page number will not be
printed on the pages that follow the set number.
Enter the total pages (1 to 999) with the numeric
keys and touch the [OK] key.
NOTES
● When two-sided copying is performed, each side of
the paper is counted as a page. If the last page is
blank, it will not be included in the total pages.
However, if [COUNT BACK COVER] is selected,
the last page will be counted. (See step 7.)
● When used in combination with "Dual page copy",
"Multi shot", or "Card shot", the number of copied
images is the total pages.
●
Unlike the first and last page numbers, "PRINTING
STARTS FROM SHEET" specifies the sheet of paper
(not the page number) from which printing of the page
number begins.
For example, when "3" is selected for one-sided
copying, printing of the page number will start from the
3rd sheet of copy paper (the copy of the 3rd original
page). When "3" is selected for two-sided copying,
printing of the page number will start from the 3rd sheet
of copy paper, which is the copy of the 5th original page.
● When used in combination with "Pamphlet copy" or
"Book copy", the number of pages in the "book" is
the total pages.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
When covers/inserts are added and you
7
9 Touch the [OK] key.
wish to include the covers/inserts in the
page number count, touch the [COVERS/
INSERTS COUNTING] key.
OK
LAST NUMBER
OK
AUTO
COVERS/INSERTS
COUNTING
LAST NUMBER
AUTO
COVERS/INSERTS
COUNTING
10Touch the [OK] key.
Select the checkboxes of the items that
you wish to include in the page number
count and then touch the [OK] key.
8
OK
CANCEL
TOTAL PAGE
AUTO
OK
COVERS/INSERTS COUNTING
COUNT FRONT COVER
MANUAL
PAGE NUMBER
COUNT INSERTS
2
COUNT BACK COVER
1
Front cover
image
Continue from step 4 of "Common
operation procedure for using the print
menu" (page 5-33).
Insert
image
Back cover
image
11
Items that are selected are reflected in the print
image on the right side of the screen.
NOTE
NOTES
To cancel a page number setting...
Touch the [CANCEL] key in the page number
selection screen. (The screen of step 10.)
● When an item is selected, one inserted sheet (front
cover, insert, or back cover) is counted as one page
during one-sided copying, and two pages during
two-sided copying. However, if one-sided copying
is used for the body pages and two-sided copying is
used for the inserted sheets, each body page will
be counted as one page and each inserted sheet
will be counted as two pages.
●
Printing never takes place on the front cover and back
cover, regardless of whether or not these are counted.
● To print on an insert, the insert must be counted
and it must be copied on.
NOTES
●
Copying in group mode is not possible when page number printing is selected. The mode will automatically switch to sort mode.
● When the page number print position is set to the left or right side and "Pamphlet copy" or "Book copy" is
selected, the position of the page numbers will alternate so that they are always on the outside when the
pamphlet/book is opened. If a stamp is set in an area with a page numbering setting, the position of the stamp
will alternate in the same way.
If another item is set in a position that changes, that item will appear in the position that alternates with the page
number position.
Print menus not related to the alternating print positions will appear in their set positions.
[Example] When the page number format "1, 2, 3.." is selected when performing pamphlet copying of 4 pages,
the copies will appear as shown below.
In this example, the page number is at the bottom of the page and the date is at the top, so the
position of the date does not change.
Print settings
Front
Back
Date
2010/APR/4
2010/APR/4
2010/APR/4
2010/APR/4
CONFIDENTIAL
CONFIDENTIAL
CONFIDENTIAL
CONFIDENTIAL
Stamp
Page numbering
Text
Minutes of meeting Minutes of meeting
Minutes of meeting Minutes of meeting
4
1
2
3
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Examples of page number printing
Page number printing during one-sided copying (5 originals)
Setting
TOTAL PAGE
Value
AUTO
1
1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page
FIRST NUMBER
LAST NUMBER
A B C D E
AUTO
1/5
2/5
3/5
4/5
5/5
PRINTING STARTS
FROM SHEET
1
FIRST NUMBER: 11
11/15
11/13
1/2
12/15
12/13
2/2
13/15
13/13
14/15
15/15
FIRST NUMBER: 11
LAST NUMBER: 13
Not printed Not printed
Printed contents when
settings are changed as
follows
TOTAL PAGE: 2
Not printed Not printed Not printed
TOTAL PAGE: 15
FIRST NUMBER: 11
LAST NUMBER: 13
11/15
12/15
13/15
1/3
Not printed Not printed
PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3 Not printed Not printed
2/3
3/3
Page number printing during two-sided copying (9 originals)
1st page
Front Back
2nd page
Front Back
3rd page
Front Back
4th page
5th page
Setting
Value
Front
Back
Front
Back
TOTAL PAGE
AUTO
1
FIRST
NUMBER
A B C D E F G H I
1/9
2/9
3/9
4/9
5/9
6/9
7/9
3/5
8/9
4/5
9/9
LAST NUMBER
AUTO
5
PRINTING
STARTS FROM
SHEET
1
Printedcontents PRINTING
when settings STARTS
are changed as FROM
follows SHEET: 3
Not
Not
Not
Not
Not
printed
1/5
2/5
5/5
printed printed printed printed
Page number printing during one-sided copying of body pages with covers inserted (4 originals)
1st page
Setting
Value
(Front
cover)
2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page
TOTAL PAGE
AUTO
1
FIRST NUMBER
LAST NUMBER
AUTO
A B C D
PRINTING STARTS
FROM SHEET
1
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
COUNT FRONT COVER
Not selected
PRINTING STARTS
FROM SHEET: 2
Not printed Not printed
1/3
3/5
2/3
4/5
3/3
5/5
COUNT FRONT
COVER: Selected
Not printed
2/5
Printed contents when
settings are changed
as follows
(count)
COUNT FRONT
COVER: Selected
PRINTING STARTS
FROM SHEET: 2
Not printed
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
(count)
When a back cover is inserted, page numbers are counted and printed in the same way.
Note that page numbers are never printed on front and back covers.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Page number printing during two-sided copying of body pages with covers (one-side copying) inserted (9 originals)
1st page
2nd page
Front Back
3rd page
Front Back
4th page
Front Back
5th page
Front Back
(front cover)
Setting
Value
Front
Back
TOTAL PAGE
FIRST NUMBER
LAST NUMBER
AUTO
1
AUTO
PRINTING
STARTS
FROM SHEET
A
B C D E F G H I
1
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
COUNTFRONT
COVER
Not selected
PRINTING STARTS
FROM SHEET: 3
Not
Not
Not
Not
Not
Not
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
printed printed printed printed printed printed
Printed
contents
when
settings are
changed as
follows
COUNT FRONT
COVER: Selected
Not printed Not printed
3/10
4/10
5/10
1/6
6/10
2/6
7/10
8/10
9/10
10/10
(count)
(count)
COUNT FRONT
COVER: Selected
PRINTING STARTS
FROM SHEET: 3
Not
Not
Not
Not
printed printed
(count) (count)
3/6
4/6
5/6
6/6
printed printed
When a back cover is inserted, page numbers are counted and printed in the same way.
Note that page numbers are never printed on front and back covers.
Page number printing during one-sided copying with inserts (4 originals; 5 originals when copying on inserts)
3rd page
Setting
TOTAL PAGE
Value
1st page 2nd page
4th page 5th page
(insert)
AUTO
1
FIRST NUMBER
LAST NUMBER
AUTO
A B C D E
PRINTING STARTS FROM
SHEET
1
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
COUNT INSERTS
Not selected
PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3 Not printed Not printed Not printed
1/2
4/5
2/2
5/5
Printed contents when
copying on inserts and
settings are changed as
follows
COUNT INSERTS: Selected
1/5
2/5
3/5 (count)
COUNT INSERTS: Selected
PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3
Not printed Not printed 1/3 (count)
2/3
4/5
2/3
3/3
5/5
3/3
Not printed
(count)
Printed contents when not
copying on inserts and
settings are changed as
follows
COUNT INSERTS: Selected
1/5
2/5
COUNT INSERTS: Selected
PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3
Not printed
(count)
Not printed Not printed
When inserts are not copied on, the page number is not printed.
Page number printing during two-sided copying of body pages with inserts (one-side copying) (9 originals)
3rd page
1st page
Front Back
2nd page
Front Back
4th page
Front Back
5th page
Front Back
(insert)
Setting
Value
Front
Back
TOTAL PAGE
AUTO
1
FIRST NUMBER
LAST NUMBER
AUTO
A B C D E
F G H I
PRINTING STARTS
FROM SHEET
1
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
COUNT INSERTS Not selected
Printed contents
when settings are
changed as follows Selected
COUNT
INSERTS:
Not
printed
(count)
1/10
2/10
3/10
4/10
5/10
7/10
8/10
9/10
10/10
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Printing entered text on copies
Entered text can be printed on copies. Up to 50 characters can be printed.
Up to 30 sequences of frequently used text can be stored. See "Storing text sequences" (page 5-42).
NOTE
When the machine is connected to a network, the printed text sequences can be stored and deleted in the Web
page. For details, see Help in the Web page.
Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common
operation procedure for using the print
menu" (page 5-33).
1
5 Touch the [OK] key.
OK
To edit the selected text
sequence, touch the
[DIRECT ENTRY] key
to display the character
entry screen. The
selected text sequence
CANCEL
3
DIRECT E
1/5
6
2 Touch the [TEXT] key.
04
05
06
OK
LAYOUT
CANCEL
OK
is
entered.
For
1/2
DATE
STAMP
When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the
character entry screen.
PAGE
NUMBERING
TEXT
6 Select the pages to be printed on.
If you wish to use one of the preset text
sequences, touch the [RECALL] key. To
directly enter the text, touch the [DIRECT
ENTRY] key.
3
4
Select whether to print
CANCEL
OK
on only the first page,
or all pages. The
FIRST PAGE
touched
highlighted.
key
is
ALL PAGES
CANCEL
OK
TEXT
DIRECT ENTRY
FIRST PAGE
5
PRE-SET
ALL PAGES
RECALL
RE/DELETE
DIRECT ENTRY
7 Touch the [OK] key.
If you touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key, a character
entry screen will appear. For information on
finished, click the [OK] key to close the character
entry screen. (Go to step 6.)
CANCEL
OK
FIRSE
ALL PAGES
DIRECT ENTRY
The stored text sequences will appear as
keys. Touch the key of the desired text
sequence.
Continue from step 4 of "Common
operation procedure for using the print
menu" (page 5-33).
CANCEL
OK
8
TEXT
3
6
DIRECT ENTRY
1/5
RECALL
No.04
5
No.06
No.01 TARO YAMADA
No.02 Meeting
No.03
NOTE
To cancel a text setting...
Touch the [CANCEL] key in the text print screen. (The
screen of step 7.)
The selected text sequence key is highlighted.
If the desired text sequence key does not appear,
change screens with the
or
key.
The display is initially set to show 6 keys per
screen. This can be changed to 3 keys per screen
by touching the [3 6] key. When 3 keys are
displayed, the entire text sequence will appear in
each key. (When 6 keys are displayed, up to 22
characters appear in each key.)
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
Storing text sequences
Editing and deleting stored text
Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common
Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common
1
1
operation procedure for using the print
menu" (page 5-33).
operation procedure for using the print
menu" (page 5-33).
2 Touch the [TEXT] key.
2 Touch the [TEXT] key.
OK
OK
LAYOUT
LAYOUT
CANCEL
OK
CANCEL
OK
1/2
1/2
DATE
STAMP
DATE
STAMP
PAGE
NUMBERING
PAGE
NUMBERING
TEXT
TEXT
3 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.
3 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.
PRE-SET
PRE-SET
RECALL
STORE/DELETE
RECALL
STORE/DELETE
Touch
a
key that has not been
Touch the text key that you wish to edit or
delete.
4
4
5
programmed (a key in which No. xx
appears).
TEXT
3
6
BACK
STORE/DELETE
TEXT
1/5
No.04 Minutes of meeting
No.01 TARO YAMADA
3
6
BACK
STORE/DELETE
1/5
No.02 Meeting
No.03
5
No.06
No.04
No.05
No.06
No.01 TARO YAMADA
No.02 Meeting
No.03
To edit the text, touch the [AMEND] key. To
delete the text, touch the [DELETE] key.
When touched, the character entry screen
appears. Enter the text (max. 50 characters). For
When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the
character entry screen.
When the [AMEND] key is
touched, the character
entry screen appears.
The selected text
sequence is entered. For
information on entering
characters, see page 7-
A TEXT HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED TO
LOCATION. CHANGE THE TEXT?
If no free keys appear, change screens with the
CANCEL
DELETE
No.06
AMEND
or
key.
5 Touch the [BACK] key.
29. When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the
character entry screen.
If you touch the [DELETE] key, the text will be deleted
and you will return to the screen of step 4.
To cancel editing or deletion, touch the [CANCEL] key.
The entered text is
stored.
3
6
BACK
1/5
04 Minutes of meeting
05
06
6 Touch the [BACK] key.
3
6
BACK
1/5
04 Minutes of meeting
05
06
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL MODES
■ Checking and changing the print layout
You can check the print layout after the print items have been selected. If needed you can change the print
position or delete print content.
Touch the [LAYOUT] key on the print menu
screen.
1
2
4 Touch the key of the new position.
The selected key is
OK
highlighted and the
SELECTED ITEM.
LAYOUT
OK
CANCEL
STAMP
print position changes
to the new position.
1/
PAGE
NUMBERING
TEXT
The keys indicating the print position appear as
follows depending on the state of the setting:
Touch the key in which you wish to change
the print position or delete print content.
Print position without any set print
menus.
OK
LAYOUT
TARO YAMADA
CONFIDENTIAL
DO NOT COPY
Currently set print position.
Print position with another competing
print menu set.
1,2,3..
(When moving a stamp, this indicates
that another stamp has been set. When
moving a print menu other than a stamp,
this indicates that the date, page number,
or text has been set.)
NOTE
Up to 14 characters of the print text appears in the
key.
5
To change the print position, touch the
[MOVE] key. To delete print content, touch
the [DELETE] key.
3
NOTE
If you wish to swap the contents of two positions,
temporarily move the content of one position to an
unused position and then complete the swap.
If you touched the
[MOVE] key, the new
DO YOU WANT TO MOVE OR DELETE THE
SELECTED ITEM?
position
selection
screen appears.
CANCEL
DELETE
MOVE
1,..
5 Touch the [OK] key.
If you touched the
[DELETE] key, the print
content is deleted. (Go
to step 6.)
OK
If you attempt to move
print content to
a
position that already
has print content set, a
message will appear
asking you if you wish
to
overwrite
the
previously set content.
To overwrite the content, touch the [YES] key. To
cancel the move and return to the condition before
the [OK] key was touched, touch the [NO] key.
6 Touch the [OK] key.
OK
CONFIDENTIAL
DO NOT COPY
1,2,3..
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STORING, USING AND DELETING
JOB PROGRAMS
The steps of up to 10 copy jobs can be stored as job programs. Job programs can be called up with ease, and are
retained even when the power is turned off. By storing frequently used copy settings in a job program, you can
eliminate the bother of selecting the settings each time you use them for a copy job.
●If any settings related to the steps of a job program are changed in the administrator settings after the job program
is stored, the steps related to the changed settings will not be included when the job program is called up.
●To exit the job programs mode, press the [CA] (clear all) key on the operation panel or touch the [EXIT] key on the
touch panel.
Storing a job program
1 Press the [#/P] key.
5 Touch the [OK] key.
The selected settings
will be stored in the
number key selected in
step 3.
NCEL
OK
AUTO
LOGOUT
ORIGINAL
2 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.
M NUMBER.
■ If a number key is selected in step 3 that has
already been programmed.
A setting confirmation screen will appear. To replace
the existing program with the new program, touch
the [STORE] key and continue from step 4. If you do
not wish to replace the existing program, touch the
[CANCEL] key to return to the screen of step 3 and
select a different number key.
RECALL
STORE/DELETE
Touch the number key ([1] to [10]) in which
you wish to stored the job program.
Number keys in which
3
PROGRAMS
job
already
programs
stored
are
are
NOTE
ESS PROGRAM NUMBER.
If overwriting of programmed copy settings has been
prohibited in the administrator settings, it will not be
possible to store or delete a job program. (See page
17 of the administrator settings guide.)
highlighted.
RECALL
STORE/
Select the copy settings that you wish to
store in the job program.
4
The number of copies
cannot be stored.
TO STORE, MAKE SELECTIONS AND PRESS
[OK], TO DELETE, PRESS [CANCEL].
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
1.
A4
2.
B5
3.
4. A3
B4
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB PROGRAMS
Calling up a job program
Set the number of copies if needed and
then press the [START] key.
1 Press the [#/P] key.
3
Copying will begin using
the settings of the job
program.
LOGOUT
Touch the number key of the desired job
program.
2
JOB PROGRAMS
The
screen
automatically closes and
the job program is called
up. A number key that
does not have a job
program cannot be
selected.
PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER.
RECALL
Deleting a stored job program
5
1 Press the [#/P] key.
4 Touch the [DELETE] key.
The selected program is
A JOB PROGRAM HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED
IN THIS LOCATION.
deleted and you return
to the screen of step 3.
To return to the screen of
step 3 without deleting
the job program, touch
the [CANCEL] key. In
both cases, touch the
CANCEL
RECALL
DELETE
STORE
LOGOUT
STORE/DELETE
2 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.
[EXIT] key on the screen displayed in the screen of
step 3 to exit the job program mode.
M NUMBER.
NOTE
If overwriting of programmed copy settings has been
prohibited in the administrator settings, it will not be
possible to store or delete a job program. (See page
17 of the administrator settings guide.)
RECALL
STORE/DELETE
Select a storage register number of the
program to be deleted.
3
EXIT
If a number key for which
no job program has been
stored is selected, the
screen will change to the
screen of step 4 on the
STORE/DELETE
previous page for storing
a job program.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN
The copy of the original scanned in interrupt mode is output before the remainder of the interrupted copy job.
Place the original for the interrupt copy job
in the document feeder or on the
1 Touch the [INTERRUPT] key.
2
If interrupt copying is
INTERRUPT
possible during a copy
run, the [INTERRUPT]
key will appear. (If the
key does not appear,
interrupt copying is not
possible.)
AUTO
ORIGINA
AUTO
EXPOSUR
2
3
A4
CANCEL
When the [INTERRUPT]
key is touched in step 1,
the [INTERRUPT] key
will be replaced by the
[CANCEL] key as shown
in the illustration.
0
AUTO
EXPOSURE
ORIGINAL
A
Select the exposure mode, paper size,
number of copies, and any other copy
settings as needed, and then press the
[START] key.
3
AUTO A4
APER SELECT
100%
To cancel an interrupt
copy job while the interrupt original is being
scanned or while you are selecting copy settings,
touch the [CANCEL] key.
NOTES
● If you touch the [INTERRUPT] key when auditing
mode is enabled, the display will prompt you to
enter your account number. Enter your account
number with the numeric keys. The copies you
make will be added to the count of the entered
account number.
The previous copy job automatically
resumes after the interrupt job finishes.
4
● If a copy is being printed when the [INTERRUPT]
key is pressed, interrupt mode will begin after the
copy is finished.
● If the copy run to be interrupted is using paper
from the bypass tray, the paper size and type of the
bypass tray cannot be changed for use by the
interrupt job.
● If the document glass is used for an interrupt copy
job, two-sided copying, sort copying, and staple
sort copying cannot be selected. If any of these
functions are necessary, use the document feeder.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER MAINTENANCE
To ensure good service from this product over a long period of time, it is recommended that the following
maintenance procedures be performed on a regular basis.
CAUTION
Do not use flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical
components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.
NOTE
When cleaning, do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents.
Cleaning the document glass and the automatic document
feeder
If the document glass, document cover or automatic document scanning unit have dirty spots, these spots will form
lines in scanned images. These will show up as defects when the images are printed. Always keep these parts clean.
Wipe with a clean, soft cloth. If necessary, moisten the
cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent.
When finished, wipe dry with a clean cloth.
If black or white stripes
appear
on
printed
images of originals that
were fed through the
automatic
document
feeder, wipe the long
narrow glasses in the
in the illustration).
scanning unit ( and
Example of dirty print image
Black stripes
White stripes
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Check the following troubleshooting list before requesting service as many problems can be fixed by the user. If you
are unable to solve the problem by checking the list, turn off the main power switch and the power switch, and unplug
the power cord.
Problems related to the copy function are described below. For problems related to general use of the machine, see
Problem
Check
Solution
Machine does not Is the [START] key indicator off?
operate.
This indicates that the machine is warming
up (warming up lasts no more than 120
seconds after the power switch is turned on).
Copying is not possible during this time. Wait
until the [START] key light illuminates.
Copies are too dark Is the original image too dark or too light?
or too light.
Select an appropriate exposure mode for the
original being copied and adjust the copy
Is the exposure mode set to "AUTO"?
The exposure level for "AUTO" can be
adjusted using "Exposure adjustment" in the
administrator settings. Contact your
administrator. (See page 16 of the
administrator settings guide.)
An appropriate exposure mode for the Change the exposure mode to "AUTO" or
original has not been selected.
manually select an appropriate resolution
Text is not clear on a An appropriate exposure mode for the Change the exposure mode to "TEXT". (See
copy.
original has not been selected.
Smudges appear on Document glass or document cover dirty?
copies.
Black lines appear on copies when the Clean the original scanning area. (See page
used.
Original smudged or blotchy?
Use a clean original.
6
Image cannot be Is the auto paper select or auto image Rotation copy functions only if the machine
rotated.
Part of
function selected?
is either in the auto paper select mode or in
original Is the original positioned correctly?
image is not copied.
Is the copy ratio proper for the original and Use the auto image function to select the
paper sizes?
appropriate copy ratio based on the original
Blank copies
Is the original placed correctly?
When using the document glass, place the
original face down.
When using the automatic document feeder,
Order of copies Is the order of originals correct?
incorrect
When using the document glass, place the
originals from the first page one sheet at a
time.
When using the automatic document feeder,
place the originals with the first page up.
Job
needed
cancellation Is a message requesting cancellation of job Press the [CA] key to cancel the current job.
displayed?
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 7
DOCUMENT FILING
FUNCTION
Page
OVERVIEW............................................................................................. 7-2
●
●
●
Saving files...................................................................................... 7-4
●
●
●
Quick File ........................................................................................ 7-6
●
Filing................................................................................................ 7-7
●
Print jobs......................................................................................... 7-9
●
Scan Save....................................................................................... 7-10
●
●
●
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OVERVIEW
Document filing function
The document filing function allows you to save a document image in the machine's hard disk as a data file. The
image can be called up and printed or transmitted as needed.
The scanned document image is saved when printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or
image send mode ("QUICK FILE" or "FILE"). A document can also be scanned and saved without being printed,
copied, or transmitted ("scan save").
To allow you to search for the file and call it up, names (user name, file name, etc.) can be assigned to the file (except
when using Quick File).
■ Data flow
Printing in copy mode (Quick
File saving, page 7-6)
Machine hard disk
Printing from a computer (printer
data, page 7-9)
Print
Call up a saved
file to reuse it.
Save to machine's
hard disk
Transmission in fax/image send
mode (filing, page 7-7)
HDD
Send
(facsimile or image send
function must be required)
and
Scanning a document only
(scan save, page 7-10)
Machine hard disk
QUICK FILE FOLDER
Data is saved by job
MAIN FOLDER
CUSTOM FOLDER
A user name and file name can
be specified for each file and
the file saved to a folder with
any desired name assigned.
A user name and file name is
specified for each saved job
A password
Folder 1
A password
can be set
File 1
File 2
File 1
File 2
can be set
Folder 2
A password
can be set
Folder 3
File 1
File 2
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OVERVIEW
■ Quick File folder
When [QUICK FILE FOLDER] is selected in the main screen of any of the modes, the file is saved in this folder.
Up to 1000 files can be saved in the Quick File folder. All files in the Quick File Folder can be deleted using the
administrator settings. If you have a file that you do not want deleted, set the file attribute to [PROTECT] (up to 500
The following user and file names are automatically assigned (the names cannot be selected):
User name : User unknown
File name (example) : COPY_04042010_113050AM (job mode and month, day, year, hour, minute, second, AM/
PM of save). (In the example, the file was saved on 4/4/2010 at 11:30 and 50 sec in copy mode.)
When saved, jobs are classified by mode. A saved job can be called up from the COMPLETE job status screen.
■ Main folder
When saving a file, a previously stored user name (see [SYSTEM SETTINGS] on page 7-24) can be specified and
any file name can be assigned.
A password can also be set for a saved file ([CONFIDENTIAL] save). (See [Property change] on page 7-21.)
If a user name and file name are not selected, a name in the same format as Quick File is automatically assigned.
■ Custom folder
Up to 500 folders (named as desired) can be created in this folder. When saving a file in one of these folders, a
previously stored user name (see [SYSTEM SETTINGS] on page 7-24) can be specified and any file name can be
assigned.
A password can be set for a file saved in one of these folders.
■ Attributes of saved files
The protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function. This prevents a file from being
moved or automatically or manually deleted.
Three attributes are available for saved files: [SHARING], [PROTECT], and [CONFIDENTIAL]. When saved with
the [SHARING] attribute, a file is not protected. When saved with the [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL] attribute, a
file is protected.
Files saved to the Quick File folder are all [SHARING]. When saving a file to the main folder or a custom folder,
[SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL] can be selected.
● A [SHARING] file can be changed to a [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL] file using [Property change] (page 7-21).
● A password is set for a [CONFIDENTIAL] file to protect it. (The password must be entered to call up the file.)
● A password cannot be set for a [PROTECT] file, however, as long as the file is not changed to [SHARING] with
[PROPERTY CHANGE], the file will be protected.
CAUTION
7
● Documents saved with [QUICK FILE] are shared files that can be called up by anyone and printed or transmitted. For this
reason, do not use Quick File for sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be reused by others.
● When saving a document with [FILE], set the attribute to [CONFIDENTIAL] and set a password to prevent others from
reusing the document.
● Even when a file is saved with the [CONFIDENTIAL] attribute, the attribute can be changed afterward to [SHARING] using
[Property change] (page 7-21). For this reason, do not save sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be
reused by others.
● Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages that result from the
leaking of sensitive information due to 1) manipulation by a third party of any data saved using the Quick File function or
filing function, or 2) incorrect operation of the Quick File function or filing function by the operator that saves the data.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION
A look at the operation panel
PRINT
READY
DOCUMENT
DATA
FILING
LINE
IMAGE SEND
DATA
COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
LOGOUT
1
4
5
Touch panel (see the next page)
Numeric keys
This displays messages and keys. Keys can be
touched to select and enter settings.
Use these keys to enter a password or a numeric
value for a setting.
When a key is touched, a beep will sound and the
key will be highlighted to indicate that it is selected.
When a key cannot be selected in a screen, it will
be greyed out. If touched, a warning beep will
sound to alert you that it cannot be selected.
[C] key (Clear key)
Use this key if you make a mistake when entering a
password or numeric setting.
This key is also used to cancel scanning of a
document.
2
3
Mode select keys
6
7
[CA] key (Clear all key)
Use this key to select the mode.
Use this key to cancel a setting procedure and
return to the main screen. The key is also used to
cancel a special function.
[DOCUMENT FILING] key
Touch this key to display the main screen of
document filing mode.
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
Use this key to store, edit or delete a user name or
custom folder.
Saving files
To save files to the main folder or custom folders, a user name must be previously stored. To create a folder in the
custom folder, the folder name must be stored. These settings are configured in the system settings.
Follow the procedures explained in "Programming a user name", "Editing and deleting a user name", "Creating a
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION
Main screen of document filing
Document filing icons
To display the main screen of document filing, press
the [DOCUMENT FILING] key when the touch panel
shows the copy mode screen, image send mode, or the
job status screen.
Main
icon
Icon of
confidential protected
file or folder file
Icon of
Meaning
The main screen shows messages, keys, and items
that can be selected for document filing.
Folder
Copy job file
FILE STORE
SCAN TO HDD
FILE RETRIEVE
Print job file
(including direct
print jobs)
FILE
FOLDER
QUICK FILE
FOLDER
Fax transmission
job file
SEARCH
GLOBAL ACCESS
HDD STATUS
PC-FAX
transmission job
file
1
2
Message display
Displays messages.
Internet
fax
[SCAN TO HDD] key
transmission job
file
Touch to select scan save. Scan save is used to
save the image file of a scanned document in the
main folder or a custom folder without printing or
transmitting the document.
PC-Internet fax
transmission job
file
3
4
[FILE FOLDER] key
Touch to call up a file from the main folder or the
custom folder. When the key is touched, the files in
the main folder or the folders in the custom folder
appear.
Scan save file
E-mail
transmission job
file
[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key
Touch to call up a file from the Quick File folder.
When the key is touched, the files in the Quick File
folder appear.
FTP
transmission job
file
5
6
[SEARCH] key
Touch to search for a file by user name, file name,
or folder name.
Desktop
transmission job
file
7
[HDD STATUS] key
Touch to check the use of the machine's hard disk.
Network Folder
transmission job
file
The following icons may appear added to a main icon
or alone.
Icon
Meaning
Confidential file or folder
Protected file
NOTE
When the file of a job that was saved using scan save
is printed in job settings, the icon of the job is
highlighted.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE
Quick File
When printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or fax/image transmission mode,"QUICK
FILE" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Quick File folder.
The image can be called up at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate
the original.
NOTE
As an example, the procedure for saving a document to the Quick File folder while copying using the automatic
document feeding function is explained below.
Place the original in the document feeder
and select resolution and exposure
settings.
The saved image can be called up from the
Quick File folder or the job status screen.
1
2
4
AUTO
●To call the image up from the Quick File folder,
page 7-15.
●To call the job up from the finished job status
screen, see "Calling up and manipulating a
See steps 1 to 8 of
feeding function" on
ORIGINAL
AUTO
EXPOSURE
14.
A4
AUTO
The following operations can be
performed on the image that was called up
in step 4.
5
Touch the [QUICK FILE] key in the main
screen.
The [QUICK FILE] key
will be highlighted to
indicate that the function
FILE
is selected.
If the [FILE] key is
QUICK FILE
greyed out, only the
[QUICK FILE] key can
be selected.
When you touch the [QUICK FILE] key, a message
asking you to confirm the save will appear. Touch
the [OK] key in the message screen and go to the
next step.
If you wish to cancel the save, touch the [QUICK
FILE] key after touching the [OK] key so that the
[QUICK FILE] key is no longer highlighted.
Press the [START] key on the operation
panel.
3
To prevent accidental
saving of the document,
the
SCANNED DATA IS
STORED IN THE
warning
"THE
QUICK FILE FOLDER."
appears for 6 seconds
after the [START] key is pressed.
When copying begins, the image is saved.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE
Filing
When printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or image send mode, "FILE" can be selected
to save an image of the document to the main folder or a previously created custom folder. The image can be called
up at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate the original.
NOTE
As an example, the procedure for using the filing function while copying using the automatic document feeding
function is explained below.
Place the original in the document feeder
and select resolution and exposure
1
5 Touch the [OK] key.
The touched user name is selected and you return to the
screen of step 3. The selected user name appears.
settings.
AUTO
ORIGINAL
See steps 1 to 8 of
feeding function" on
NOTE
If you do not select a user name, the following name
is automatically selected:
Example : User unknown
AUTO
EXPOSURE
14.
A4
AUTO
6 Touch the [FILE NAME] key.
USER NAME
FILE NAME
STORETO:
A character entry screen
appears. Enter a file
name (maximum of 30
characters). (See page
2 Touch the [FILE] key in the main screen.
COPY
MAI
An information entry
screen appears.
to
enter
FILE
characters.)
QUICK ILE
NOTE
If you do not enter a file name, a file name in the
following format is automatically assigned:
Auto generated file name : Month, day, year, hour,
minute, second, AM/PM
3 Touch the [USER NAME] key.
(Example : COPY_04042010_113050AM)
CONFIDENTIAL
7 Touch the [STORED TO:] key.
USER NAME
USER NAME
FILE ME
COPY
7
COPY
MAIN
FILE NAME
STORED TO:
Touch the desired user name in the list of
user names that appears.
4
1/1
Suzuki
Sasaki
Hasegawa
Nakata
Touch the desired folder name in the list of
folder names that appears
8
Ono
Yamada
ALL USERS
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST UVWXYZ
CUSTOM FOLDER 1
CUSTOM FOLDER 3
CUSTOM FOLDER 5
CUSTOM FOLDER 7
CUSTOM FOLDER 2
CUSTOM FOLDER 4
CUSTOM FOLDER 6
CUSTOM FOLDER 8
1/2
User names must be previously stored
ALL FOLDERS
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRS
UVWXY
Folder names must be previously stored.
password has been set for the folder, a password
entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit
password for the folder.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE
You will return to the screen of step 4. The
set password is displayed with " ".
9 Touch the [OK] key.
14
The touched folder is
FOLDER
selected and you return
to the screen of step 5.
The selected folder
name is displayed.
OK
OK
CANCEL
PASSWORD
2/2
XYYY
If needed, select the [CONFIDENTIAL]
checkbox (only in copy mode).
When this is selected, the
15Touch the [OK] key.
10
You will return to the main screen.
file is stored with the
attribute [CONFIDENTIAL].
To call up the file, the
password that will be set in
the following steps must be
entered.
FILE INFORMATION
Press the [START] key on the operation
panel.
16
CONFIDENTIAL
When copying begins,
the image is saved.
ER NAME
●If you selected the [CONFIDENTIAL]
checkbox, touch the [PASSWORD] key and
enter a password.
●If you did not select the [CONFIDENTIAL]
checkbox, go to step 16. The file will be saved
as a [SHARING] file.
The saved image can be called up using
17
the file name, folder name, or user name,
or from the filing folder.
11Touch the [PASSWORD] key.
●To call up the image by entering the file name,
folder name, or user name, see "Searching for
●To call up the image from the filing folder, see
15.
The password entry
screen appears.
CAN
PASSWORD
XYYY
The following operations can be
18
performed on the image that was called
up:
Enter a 5-digit password with the numeric
keys.
12
As each digit is entered,
"
-" changes to " ".
CANCEL
ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.
13Touch the [OK] key.
0
CANCEL
OK
10-KEY PAD.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE
Print jobs
Print jobs sent to the machine using the machine's
printer driver can be saved in the main folder or a
previously created custom folder when printed. The
saved print data can be called up and printed or
transmitted without having to open the original file on
your computer.
Touch the key of the folder that contains
the desired file.
3
4
CUSTOM FOLDER
MAIN FOLDER
If a password is set for
the selected folder, a
password entry screen
will appear. Enter the 5-
digit password with the
numeric keys.
CUSTOM FOLDER 1
CUSTOM FOLDER 3
CUSTOM FOLDER 5
CUSTOM FOLDER 7
CUSTO
CUSTO
CUSTO
CUSTO
This section gives an overview of this function and
explains the procedure for printing from the operation
panel of the machine.
For the procedures that are performed at your
computer when initiating printing such as selecting the
save location and file attribute, see the printer driver
Help file.
ALL FOLDERS
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN OPQRS
Touch the printer icon ( ) tab and then
touch the key of the desired file.
CUSTOM FOLDER
SEARCH
BACK
MAIN FOLDER
FILE NAME
Basic
USER NAME
DATE
1
1
2003/10/01
2003/10/01
2003/10/01
Yamada
Sato
■ Using a print job file (printing,
presentation
Product
deleting, transmitting, etc.)
Akata
PRINTS
BATCH P.
Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the
operation panel.
1
The following screen appears if the [QUICK FILE
FOLDER] key is touched in step 2.
PRINT
READY
DOCUMENT
DATA
FILING
SEARCH
BACK
QUICK FILE FOLDER
FILE NAME
LINE
IMAGE SEND
DATA
USER NAME
DATE
1
1
2003/10/01
2003/10/01
Tanaka7890123456
Suzuki7890123456
User unknown
User unknown
COPY
SYSTEM
PRINTS
BATCH P.
Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key or the
[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key depending on
where the file is saved.
2
Touch the key of the file that you wish to call up. A
menu screen will appear.
If a password is set for the file, a password entry
screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit password with
the numeric keys.
FILE RETRIEVE
FILE
FOLDER
QUICK FILE
FOLDER
Touch the key of the operation that you
wish to perform.
5
7
SEARCH
(1)
(2)
(3)
HDD STATUS
CANCEL
JOB SETTINGS
●Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key if the file is
saved in the main folder or the custom folder.
Touch the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key if the
file is saved in the Quick File folder.
Basic specifications
SELECT THE JOB.
PRINT
Yamada Taro
A4
PROPERTY
CHANGE
SEND
MOVE
DELETE
DETAIL
If you touched the [FILE FOLDER] key, the
files in the main folder or the folders in the
custom folder appear. If you open the wrong
folder, touch the [MAIN FOLDER] key or the
[CUSTOM FOLDER] key and open the
correct folder.
●If the desired file is saved in the main folder,
go to step 4. If the desired file is saved in a
custom folder, go to step 3.
(4)
(5)
(6)
●If you touched the [QUICK FILE FOLDER]
key, the files in the Quick File folder appear.
Go to step 4.
The setting screen of the selected operation
appears. See the indicated page.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE
Scan Save
Scan save is used to save a scanned document image in the main folder or the custom folder without copying or transmitting it.
Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the
operation panel.
Perform any of the following steps 7 to 16
as needed. When finished, go to step 17 on
page 7-11.
1
6
PRINT
READY
DOCUMENT
FILING
DATA
●To set the original size, perform steps 7 to 10.
●To set the resolution, perform steps 11 to 13
LINE
DATA
IMAGE SEND
COPY
on page 7-11
●To select the exposure, perform steps 14 to 16
on page 7-11
.
SYSTEM
.
●If you no not wish to select any of the above
2 Touch the [SCAN TO HDD] key.
FILE STORE
7 Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.
SCAN TO HDD
300x300dpi
RESOLUTION
AUTO
ORIGINAL
3 Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.
special
Select
any
functions that you wish
to use (otherwise skip
this step).
To set the original size, see "Manually
SPECIAL MODES
8
INFOTION
When the [SPECIAL
MODES] key is touched,
If the original is two-sided, touch the [2-
SIDED BOOKLET] key or the [2-SIDED
TABLET] key depending on where the
pages are bound.
9
the
special
modes
selection screen appears. (See "Using special
SCAN SIZE
AUTO
STORE SIZ
AUTO
NOTE
100%
For explanations of the special functions, see page
7-12 and chapter 5.
2-SIDED
BOOKLET
2-SIDED
TABLET
4 Touch the [FILE INFORMATION] key.
SPECIAL MODES
10Touch the [OK] key.
FILE
INFORMATION
You will return to the
screen of step 7.
OK
STORE SIZE
AUTO
The screens for selecting the user name, file
name, folder, and attribute appear. Configure the
settings as explained in step 3 to step 15 on
pages 7-7 to 7-8. When step 15 is completed, you
will return to the main screen of document filing.
5
IDED
NOTE
FILE RETRIEVE
FILE STORE
If the original pages are bound at the side, the
document is a "booklet". If the original pages are
bound at the top, the document is a "tablet".
FILE
FOLDER
SCAN TO HDD
QUICK FILE
FOLDER
SEARCH
GLOBAL ACCESS
HDD STATUS
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE
11Touch the [RESOLUTION] key.
16Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the
screen of step 14.
AUTO
EXPOSURE
OK
300x300dpi
RESOLUTION
MANUAL
AUTO
Place the original and touch the [START]
key.
12Touch the key of the desired resolution.
17
PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL.
[Placing the original]
●For information on placing the original, see
"NORMAL COPYING" in chapter 4.
●If you selected the "Card Shot" special function,
the document glass must be used.
SCAN TO HDD
OK
200x200dpi
300x300dpi
400x400dpi
600x600dpi
AUTO
EXPOSURE
RESOLUTION
HALF TONE
AUTO
ORIGINAL
●If you selected job build mode, the automatic
document feeding function must be used.
Select one of four resolution levels as appropriate
for the original.
The selected resolution key is highlighted.
Scanning begins.
If you are using the
document glass, touch
the [READ-END] key
after all pages have
been scanned.
13Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the
screen of step 11.
OK
NOTE
This completes the scan save procedure. Follow the
steps below when you wish to call up the image and
print or transmit it.
14Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.
The saved image can be called up using
18
the file name, folder name, or user name,
or from the filing folder.
AUTO
EXPOSURE
●To call up the image by entering the file name,
folder name, or user name, see "Searching for
●To call up the image from the filing folder, see
15.
300x300d
RESOLUTION
7
AUTO
15Select [AUTO] or [MANUAL].
The following operations can be
19
To have the exposure
adjusted automatically,
select [AUTO].
AUTO
AUTO
MANUAL
performed on the image that was called up
in step 18:
If
[MANUAL], touch the
or key to adjust
you
selected
MANUAL
the exposure.
(For a darker image, touch
the
key. For a lighter
key.)
image, touch the
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE
■ Using special functions for scan save
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main scan save screen to display the special modes screen.
The functions below can be selected in this screen.
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES]
key in the main screen.
READY TO SCAN TO HDD.
PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL.
SCAN TO HDD
BACK
AUTO
EXPOSURE
300x300dpi
RESOLUTION
SPECIAL MODES
FILE
AUTO
INFORMATION
ORIGINAL
[READY TO SCAN TO HDD.
PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL.
OK
SPECIAL MODES
DUAL PAGE
SCAN
1 2
ERASE
2in1
JOB
BUILD
CARD SHOT
1
2
4
5
[JOB BUILD] key (see page 5-8)
Use this function to erase shadows that can appear
around the edges of the image when books and
other thick originals are scanned.
When you have more pages than can be placed in
the document feeder at once, this function allows
you to scan the pages in sets.
(Equivalent to Dual page copy in copy mode)
This function allows you to save the front and back
side of a card on a single page (instead of saving
each side as a separate file).
This function is used to save the opened pages of
a book in order one page at a time (left page then
right page).
3
)
(When the fax or image send function is installed,
this corresponds to the 2in1 function explained in
the fax and network scanner manuals. This also
corresponds to the "Multishot" function in copy
mode, however, only "2in1" is possible for scan
save. )
This function reduces two original pages and
arranges the images on a single page in a uniform
layout.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE
Searching for and calling up a saved file
When calling up a file, you can enter the file name, folder name, or user name to quickly search for the file.
To search for a file, touch the [SEARCH] key in the main screen of document filing mode or in a screen that shows
folders or files in a folder. A data search screen will appear.
■ Procedure for searching for a file
Touch the [SEARCH] key in the main
screen of document filing mode or in a
screen that shows folders or files in a
folder.
Touch the one-touch key of the user name
that you wish to use to search for the file.
If you wish to directly enter the user name,
touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key.
1
4
SEARCH
If
you
touch
the
FILE
CANCEL
OK
SELECT USER NAME.
Suzuki
[SEARCH] key in the
screen that shows the
folders in the custom
folder or a screen that
shows the files in a
folder, the [SEARCH
FOLDER
Sasaki
Nakata
Yamada
Hasegawa
Ono
SEARCH
DIRECT ENTRY
HDD ATUS
ALL USERS
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST UVWXYZ
●The selected user name is highlighted.
●If you select the wrong user name, touch the
key of the correct name.
WITHIN CURRENT FOLDER] checkbox will
appear. Select this checkbox to search for a file
only in the selected folder.
●If you touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key, a
character entry screen will appear. Enter the
user name.
characters.
In the data search screen, select whether
you will search by [USER NAME] or [FILE
OR FOLDER NAME].
2
START SEARCH
CANCEL
SEARCH
5 Touch the [OK] key.
USER NAME
FILE OR FOLDER NAME
You will return to the
screen of step 2 and the
selected user name will
appear.
CANCEL
OK
●
To search by user name, follow steps 3 to 6.
●To search by file name or folder name,
perform step 8.
DIRECT ENTRY
●To stop searching, touch the [CANCEL]key.
7
6 Touch the [START SEARCH] key.
[Searching by user name]
START SEARCH
CANCEL
3 Touch the [USER NAME] key.
START SEARCH
CANCEL
SEARCH
USER NAME
FILE OR FOLDER N
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE
The results of the user name search
appear. Touch the desired file name or
folder name.
The results of the file or folder name
search appear. Touch the desired file
name or folder name.
7
10
CANCEL
SEARCH AGAIN
CANCEL
SEARCH AGAIN
SEARCH
SEARCH
DATE
DATE
FILE OR FOLDER NAME
USER NAME
AAA
FILE OR FOLDER NAME
USER NAME
Product SpecA
Product B
2003/10/20
2003/10/20
2003/10/20
Product specifications
Products
Yamada
Sato
2002/12/30
2002/12/30
AAA
AAA
Product 2
Product_info
Akata
●See page 7-5 for a list of the document filing
icons.
●See page 7-5 for a list of the document filing
icons.
●When a file name is touched, the operation
selection screen appears. (To perform an
operation using the file, go to step 5 on
●When a file name is touched, the operation
selection screen appears. (To perform an
operation using the file, go to step 5 on
●When a folder name is touched, all files in the
folder are displayed. Touch the desired file.
(To perform an operation using the file, go
●When a folder name is touched, all files in the
folder are displayed. Touch the desired file.
(To perform an operation using the file, go
●To change the order of file display, touch the
[FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key, [USER
NAME] key, or [DATE] key.
●To change the order of file display, touch the
[FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key, [USER
NAME] key, or [DATE] key.
If you touch a file name or folder name that
has a password, a password entry screen will
appear. Enter the 5-digit password with the
numeric keys.
If you touch a file name or folder name that
has a password, a password entry screen will
appear. Enter the 5-digit password with the
numeric keys.
[Searching by file or folder name]
8 Touch the [FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key.
A character entry screen
USER NAME
appears. Enter the file
FILE OR FOLDER NAME
name or folder name to
be used for the search.
characters.
9 Touch the [START SEARCH] key.
START SEARCH
CANCEL
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE
Calling up and using a saved file
A file saved with the document filing function can be called up and printed or manipulated as needed.
The following operations can be performed:
● [Print] : Print the file (page 7-17).
● [Send] : Transmit the saved file (page 7-20). The file can be transmitted by Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to
Network Folder, fax, or Internet fax. (All of these methods require installation of the appropriate options.)
(Page 1-12)
● [Property change] : Change the attribute of the saved file (page 7-21).
■ General procedure for using a saved file
Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the
operation panel.
Touch the key of the folder that contains
the desired file.
1
3
PRINT
CUSTOM FOLDER
MAIN FOLDER
SEARCH
BACK
READY
DOCUMENT
FILING
DATA
CUSTOM FOLDER 1
CUSTOM FOLDER 3
CUSTOM FOLDER 5
CUSTOM FOLDER 7
CUSTOM FOLDER 2
1/1
CUSTOM FOLDER 4
CUSTOM FOLDER 6
CUSTOM FOLDER 8
LINE
DATA
IMAGE SEND
COPY
ALL FOLDERS
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
SYSTEM
If there are more custom folder keys than can
Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key or the
[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key depending on
where the file is saved.
appear in one screen, touch the
to change screens.
or
keys
2
If a password is set for the selected folder, a
password entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-
digit password with the numeric keys.
FILE RETRIEVE
FILE
FOLDER
4 Touch the desired file key.
QUICK FILE
FOLDER
CUSTOM FOLDER
SEARCH
DATE
BACK
MAIN FOLDER
SEARCH
FILE NAME
USER NAME
1
1
HDD STATUS
2003/10/20
2003/10/20
2003/10/20
Basic specifications
Yamada
Sato
presentaion_0903
●Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key if the file is
saved in the main folder or the custom folder.
Touch the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key if the
file is saved in the Quick File folder.
If you touched the [FILE FOLDER] key, the
files in the main folder or the folders in the
custom folder appear. If you open the wrong
folder, touch the [MAIN FOLDER] key or the
[CUSTOM FOLDER] key and open the
correct folder.
Product_info
COPY
Akata
BATCH P.
7
Touch the key of the file that you wish to use.
(Parts of the screen that are framed in black are
keys that can be touched.)
A menu screen will appear.
If a password is set for the file, a password entry
screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit password with
the numeric keys.
●If the desired file is saved in the main folder,
go to step 4. If the desired file is saved in a
custom folder, go to step 3.
●If you touched the [QUICK FILE FOLDER]
key, the files in the Quick File folder appear.
Go to step 4.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE
(1) [PRINT] key (see page 7-17)
(2) [SEND] key (see page 7-20)
Touch the key of the operation that you
wish to perform.
5
(1)
(2)
(3)
(3) [PROPERTY CHANGE] key (see page 7-21)
CANCEL
JOB SETTINGS
Basic specifications
SELECT THE JOB.
PRINT
Yamada Taro
A4
PROPERTY
CHANGE
SEND
The setting screen of the selected operation
appears. See the indicated page.
MOVE
DELETE
DETAIL
(4)
(5)
(6)
FILE SELECTION SCREEN
The file selection screen of the Quick File folder, Main folder, and custom folders is explained below.
CUSTOM FOLDER
USER NAME
SEARCH
BACK
MAIN FOLDER
FILE NAME
DATE
1
3
Basic specifications
Yamada
Sato
2006/10/20
2006/10/20
2006/10/20
Products
Product_info
ALL FILES
Akata
BATCH P.
1
3
4
File keys
[Back] key
The stored files are displayed. An icon showing
which mode the file was stored from, the file name,
the user name, and the date the file was stored
appear in each file key.
When a file is touched, the job setting screen
appears.
Touch this key to return to the screen one level up.
Select displayed files by job type.
You can select the file keys that are displayed by
job type.
[ALL FILES] is initially selected.
Touch a tab to show a list of the files that were
stored from that mode.
2
[File Name] key, [User Name] key, [Date] key
Use these keys to change the order of display of
the file keys. When one of the keys is touched,
5
[Batch Print] key
or
appears in the key.
appears in the [File Name] key or [User
Name] key, the files appear by file name or user
name in ascending order.
Touch this key to print all files in a folder.
For detailed information on batch printing, see 7-
● When
When
appear in order from the oldest date.
● When appears in the [File Name] key or [User
appears in the [Date] key, the files
Name] key, the files appear by file name or user
name in descending order.
When
appears in the [Date] key, the files
appear in order from the most recent date.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE
■ [Print]
A saved file can be printed.
The screen below appears when the [PRINT] key is selected in the operation selection screen. To begin printing,
7
touch the [PRINT] ( ) key. Printing settings can be selected in this screen before printing. The settings that were
in effect when the file was saved appear initially. The settings can be changed as needed.
NOTES
● When print settings are changed with this procedure, only the value for the number of copies is overwritten.
● The printing speed will be slower for image files saved using certain resolution settings. (See page 7-31.)
CANCEL
JOB SETTINGS / PRINT
A4
Basic specifications
AUTO
Yamada Taro
NUMBER OF PRINTS
PAPER SELECT
PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA
PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA
(1~999)
OUTPUT
1
2-SIDED
TANDEM PRINT
1
2
4
[PAPER SELECT] key
[TANDEM PRINT] key
Use this key to set the paper size.
If the conditions for tandem printing are met (page
5-10), touch this key to enable tandem printing.
[OUTPUT] key
Use this key to select sort, group or staple sort
functions, and to select the output tray.
5
6
[NUMBER OF PRINTS] setting key
Use this key to set the number of copies.
3
[2-SIDED] key
[PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA] key
When performing two-sided printing, use this key to
select the orientation of the image on the back side
of the paper. To have the front and back images
oriented in the same direction, touch the [2-SIDED
BOOKLET] key. To have the front and back images
oriented opposite to each other, touch the [2-
SIDED TABLET] key. Note that the size and
orientation of the saved image may cause these
keys to have the opposite effect. If neither key is
selected, one-sided printing will take place.
Touch this key to print a file and then have it
automatically deleted.
7
[PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA] key
7
Touch this key to print a file. The file will not be
automatically deleted after printing.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE
■ Batch printing
All files in a folder that have the same user name and password can be printed at once.
Touch the [BATCH P.] key in the file list
screen of document filing mode.
If a password has been established, touch
the [PASSWORD] key.
1
4
To print all files of a
Enter the password with
the numeric keys (5 to 8
digits) and touch the
[OK] key. Only files that
2006/01/01
specific type of job,
touch the desired job
USER NAME
PASSWORD
Suzuki
2006/01/01
tab. The files shown on
that tab can be printed
BATCH P.
have
password
selected.
the
same
will be
as a batch.
If you do not wish to enter a password, go to the
next step.
2 Touch the [USER NAME] key.
To set the number of copies, touch the
[CHANGE PRT.NO.] key.
5
ALL FILES
If you wish to use the
USER NAME
PASSD
number of copies stored
with each file, go to step
9.
CHANGE PRT.NO.
NT AND DELETE THE TA
Touch the user name of the files that you
wish to print by batch printing.
3
Touch the [APPLY THE NUMBER FROM
STORED SETTING OF EACH JOB]
checkbox to remove the checkmark.
6
7
BATCH PRINT
SELECT USER NAME.
ALL USERS
CANCEL
OK
USER UNKNOWN
Sasaki
1
2
Suzuki
Hasegawa
Ono
Nakata
Yamada
APPLY THE NUMBER FRO
EACH JOB
ALL USERS
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST UVWXYZ
NOTE
When [SELECTION OF [ALL USERS] IS NOT
ALLOWED.] checkbox and [SELECTION OF [USER
UNKNOWN] IS NOT ALLOWED.] are disabled in the
administrator settings, the [ALL USERS] key and
[USER UNKNOWN] key can be selected.
The [ALL USERS] key can be touched to select all
files in the folder (the files of all users).
The [USER UNKNOWN] key can be touched to
select all files in the folder that do not have a user
name.
Set the number of copies with the
keys.
The number of copies
can be also set with the
numeric keys.
R FROM STORED SETG OF
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE
Touch the [PRINT AND DELETE THE
DATA] key or the [PRINT AND SAVE THE
DATA] key.
8 Touch the [OK] key.
9
CANCEL
OK
If the [PRINT AND
DELETE THE DATA] key
PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA
PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA
is touched, the files will
be automatically deleted
after printing.
If the [PRINT AND SAVE
THE DATA] key is
touched, the files will be saved after printing.
If there are no files that match the search
conditions, you will return to the file list screen.
NOTES
● If "Auditing mode" is enabled in the administrator settings for copy mode, print mode, or document filing mode,
it will not be possible to perform batch printing of [ALL FILES].
● To display the job tab of a mode for which "Auditing mode" is enabled in the administrator settings, the account
number must be entered.
7
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE
■ [Send]
A saved file can be transmitted by Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, fax, or Internet fax.
These transmission methods require installation of the appropriate options.
The following screen appears when the [SEND] key is touched. Select the destination and other settings required
10
for transmission and then touch the [SEND] ( ) key to transmit the file. Transmission settings include the
resolution and transmission functions such as a timer setting. Change or select these settings as needed.
NOTE
Jobs that use the following special functions cannot be transmitted when called up. (The [SEND] key is greyed out
in the operation selection screen.)
Pamphlet copying, covers/insert, card shot, Multi shot.
Jobs that use the following functions can be transmitted with certain restrictions when called up:
Card shot:Can be transmitted if saved by scan save or image send.
Multi shot (2in1):Can be transmitted if saved as 2in1 using a portrait original.
[Example of FAX mode]
CANCEL
STANDARD
FAX
MODE SWITCH
ADDRESS BOOK
RESOLUTION
ADDRESS REVIEW
SPECIAL MODES
SUB ADDRESS
Basic specifications
Yamada
SEND
1
2
8
9
[RESOLUTION] key
Use this key to set the resolution.
[ADDRESS REVIEW] key
Touch this key to display the destinations.
[FILE FORMAT] key
[SPECIAL MODES] key
The [FILE FORMAT] key appears in scan mode
(Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, or Scan to Network
Folder). Touch this key to set the file format of scan
images that you transmit.
Touch this key to display the special function menu.
The functions that can be selected vary depending
on the transmission mode:
● Scan to E-mail/FTP/Network Folder
TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.
● FAX
TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.
FAX OWN ADDRESS SENDING: Your sender's
information can be included on the fax pages
printed out by the receiving machine.
● Internet FAX
3
4
[FILE NAME/USER NAME] display
This shows the file name and user name of the file
to be transmitted.
[
] key (Speed dial key)
Use this key to specify a destination by entering the
3-digit number that is assigned to an e-mail
address or fax number when it is stored in a one-
touch key or group key.
TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.
I-FAX OWN ADDRESS SEND: Your sender's
information can be included on the Internet fax
pages printed out by the receiving machine.
5
[MODE SWITCH] key
Use this key to select the transmission mode (Scan
to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder,
fax, or Internet fax).
10
[SEND] key
Touch this key after selecting transmission settings
to begin transmission. (The [START] key can also
be pressed to begin transmission.)
6
7
[CANCEL] key
Touch this key to return to the operation selection
screen.
[ADDRESS BOOK] key
Touch this key to display the destinations stored in
the directory.
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE
11
12
[SEND SETTINGS] key
[SUB ADDRESS] key or [ADDRESS ENTRY] key
● Touch this key to directly enter the destination for
a Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network
Folder, or Internet fax transmission.
● Touch this key to enter the sub-address and
passcode for an F-code fax transmission.
The [SEND SETTINGS] key is displayed in
scanner mode and in Internet fax mode.
Touch this key to set the subject and file name. In
scanner mode, the sender name can also be set.
NOTE
See the "Operation manual (for facsimile)" and "Operation manual (for image send)" for detailed explanations of
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, and
.
■ [Property change]
Select this operation to change the attribute of a saved file. Three attributes are available: [SHARING],
[PROTECT], and [ CONFIDENTIAL].
The following screen appears when the [PROPERTY CHANGE] key is selected in the operation selection screen.
Note the restrictions below on changing the attribute.
[Restrictions on changing the attribute]
CANCEL
A4
OK
JOB SETTINGS / PROPERTY CHANGE
Basic specifications
●A file that is set to [SHARING] can be
changed to [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL].
However, a [SHARING] file that is saved in the
Quick File folder can only be changed to
[PROTECT].
Yamada Taro
SHARING
PROTECT
CONFIDENTIAL
PASSWORD
●A file that is set to [PROTECT] can be
changed to [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL].
However, a [PROTECT] file that is saved in
the Quick File folder can only be changed to
[SHARING].
●A file that is saved in the Quick File folder
cannot be changed to [CONFIDENTIAL].
3 Touch the [OK] key.
Touch the [PROPERTY CHANGE] key in
the operation selection screen.
1
PROPERTY
CHANGE
OK
NCEL
7
DETAIL
2 Touch the key of the desired attribute.
SHARING
If you are changing a
[SHARING]
[PROTECT]
or
to
file
CONFIDENTIAL
[CONFIDENTIAL],
touch the [PASSWORD]
key and enter the
password.
PROTECT
PASSWORD
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE
■ [Move]
■ [Delete]
This operation is used to move a file to a different
folder.
This operation is used to delete the selected file.
Touch the [DELETE] key in the operation select
screen. A message asking you to confirm the
deletion will appear. Touch the [YES] key to delete
the file.
Only [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL] files can be
deleted. (A [PROTECT] file can be deleted by first
using [PROPERTY CHANGE] to change the
attribute to [SHARING].)
The following screen appears when the [MOVE]
key is selected.
Only [SHARING] and [CONFIDENTIAL] files can
be moved. A [PROTECT] file can be moved by first
using [PROPERTY CHANGE] to change the
attribute to [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL].
CANCEL
JOB SETTINGS / MOVE
A4
Basic specifications
Yamada Taro
■ [Detail]
SELECT THE FOLDER THE FILE IS MOVED TO.
This operation is used to show detailed information
on the selected file.
Touch the [DETAIL] key to display the information.
The information appears on two screens. Touch the
FILE NAME
MOVE TO:
Basic specifications
MOVE
key or
screens.
key to move between the two
Touch the [MOVE TO:] key and select the
folder to which you wish to move the file.
●Select the main folder or a folder in the
custom folder. A file cannot be moved to the
Quick File folder.
The file name can be changed in the information
screen. To change the name, touch the [FILE
NAME] key and enter the desired file name in the
character entry screen that appears. See page 7-
29 for the procedure for entering characters.
1
●The file name can be changed when moving a
file. To change the name, touch the [FILE
NAME] key and enter the desired file name.
characters.
2 Touch the [OK] key.
N FOLDER
OK
3 Touch the [MOVE] key.
amada Taro
OVED TO.
ations
A4
MOVE
4 Touch the [CANCEL] key.
You will return to the
CANCEL
operation
screen.
selection
A4
aro
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE
■ Calling up and manipulating a file from the job status screen
Files saved using the "FILE" and "QUICK FILE" functions appear as keys in the finished job status screen.
You can view information on a file that appears in this screen and manipulate the file.
To view information on the file, touch the
[DETAIL] key.
1 Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
4
AGE SEND
DATA
The job status screen
Use the
keys
appears.
COPY
to change screens.
DETAIL
SYSTEM
When you are finished,
touch the [OK] key to
return to the screen of
step 3.
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
CALL
2 Touch the [COMPLETE] key.
DETAIL OF
COPY
OK
FILE NAME:
COPY_20031021_153050
CALL
1/2
The finished job screen
appears.
JOB QUEUE
SIZE:A4
RESOLUTION:600x600dpi
1/8
COMPLETE
DATE:2003/10/10 15:30
PAGES:10
DETAIL
DETAIL OF
COPY
OK
FILE NAME
COPY_20031021_153050
CALL
DOCUMENT
STYLE:
2/2
1-SIDED
DATA SIZE: 21,987,543KB
3 Touch the key of the desired file.
SPECIAL
MODES:
OUTPUT:
FILE FORMAT:
If there are more keys
than can appear in one
screen and the desired
file does not appear,
JOBS COMPLETED
SET TIME
NUM
Tanaka7890123456 14:38 12/09 01
COPY
14:38 12/09 00
Suzuki783456 14:09 12/09 00
touch the
key to change
screens.
The touched key is highlighted.
key or
5 Touch the [CALL] key.
COPY
13:27 12/09 00
The operation selection
screen appears.
CALL
7
X JOB
INTE-FAX
Select and perform the desired operation as
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders
This section explains how to create, edit, and delete user names and custom folders for saving files with the
document filing function. User names and custom folders are created and edited at the operation panel of the
machine or in the Web page.
NOTES
● A previously stored name cannot be used when creating a new user name or custom folder. However, the same password
can be used more than once.
● A password cannot be omitted when creating a user name.
■ General procedure for creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders
Follow steps 1 to 3 below to create, edit, or delete a user name or custom folder. In step 3, select the key for the
specific operation that you wish to perform.
Touch the key of the operation that you
wish to perform.
Go to the page indicated below for the selected
operation.
1 Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
3
LINE
AGE SEND
DATA
COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
(1)
(2)
SYSTEM SETTINGS
DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL
OK
USER NAME REGISTRATION
AMEND/DELETE USER NAME
Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL]
key.
AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER
CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION
2
DEFAULT
SETTINGS
TOTAL COUNT
(3)
(4)
ADDRESS CONTROL
SENDER CONTROL
(1) [USER NAME REGISTRATION] key
Program a user name. (See the next page)
(2) [AMEND/DELETE USER NAME] key
(3) [CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION] key
Create a custom folder. (See page 7-27)
(4) [AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER] key
DOCUMENT FILING
CONTROL
ADMINISTRATOR
7-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
■ Programming a user name
To program a user name, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24, touch the [USER NAME REGISTRATION] key in
step 3, and then follow these steps:
If you wish to specify a folder for the user
name, touch the [STORED TO:] key. If you
1 Touch the [USER NAME] key.
6
SYSTEM SETTINGS
wish to use the main folder, go to step 8.
The lowest number that
has not yet been
programmed appears
No.001
No.001 REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.
USER NAME
Yamada
USER NAME
PASSWORD
PAS
automatically in "No.".
Touch the number to
display a character entry
screen and enter a user
SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE F
STORED TO:
SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE
MAIN FOLDER
STORED TO:
name (maximum of 16 characters). See page 7-29
for the procedure for entering characters.
The folders that have been created appear.
Touch the desired folder. If you wish to
create a new folder, or if no folders have
been created, touch the [ADD NEW] key.
7
2 Touch the [INITIAL] key.
A character entry screen
NEXT
appears. Enter up to 10
STORED TO:
MAIN FOLDER
ADD NEW
search characters. See
INITIAL
page 7-29 for the
CUSTOM FOLDER 1
CUSTOM FOLDER 2
1/1
procedure for entering
characters.
CUSTOM FOLDER 3
CUSTOM FOLDER 5
CUSTOM FOLDER 7
CUSTOM FOLDER 4
CUSTOM FOLDER 6
CUSTOM FOLDER 8
R THE FILE WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.
ALL FOLDERS
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRS
UVWXY
3 Touch the [PASSWORD] key.
If you touched the [ADD NEW] key, program a
name for the folder as explained on page 7-27.
The user name programmed in step 1 is selected
as the user name of the folder.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
A password cannot be
No.001
omitted.
Yamada
USER NAME
PASSWORD
SELECT DEFAULT FOLDER THE FIL
STORED TO:
8 Touch the [EXIT] key.
You will return to the
"USER
REGISTRATION"
screen.
"REGISTRATION
COMPLETED."
NAME
EXIT
Set a password for the user name (enter a
5-digit password with the numeric keys).
This will be the password
4
IS
will
7
– – – – –
for the user name
CANCEL
appear highlighted next
to "No.".
entered in step 1.
As each digit is entered,
ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.
"
-" changes to " ". If
you make a mistake,
press the [C] key and
then enter the correct number.
To exit, touch the [EXIT] key. To program
another user name, touch the [NEXT] key.
If you touched the [EXIT]
9
NEXT
EXIT
5 Touch the [OK] key.
key, you will return to the
screen of step 3 on page
7-24. If you touched the
[NEXT] key, a new user
entry screen will appear.
Repeat steps 1 to 9 to
program a new user.
Yamada
INITIAL
EXIT
WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.
OK
CANCEL
10-KEY PAD.
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
■ Editing and deleting a user name
To edit or delete a user name, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24 and then follow these steps:
Touch the [AMEND/DELETE USER NAME]
[Editing]
Touch the key of each item that you wish to
1
key.
OK
4
edit (edit as explained in steps 1 to 9 in
25).
AMEND/DELETE USER NAME
AMEND/DELETE OM FOLDER
When you have finished
USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE
No.001
REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.
editing
"REGISTRATION
COMPLETED."
the
items,
IS
Yamada
USER NAME
PASSWORD
INIT
will
Touch the [USER NAME] key that you wish
to edit or delete.
appear highlighted next
to "NO.".
2
SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE WITH
STORED TO:
MAIN FOLDER
EXIT
USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE
SELECT USER NAME TO AMEND/DELETE.
1/1
Suzuki
Sasaki
Nakata
When you have finished editing the
desired items, touch the [EXIT] key.
To edit another user
Hasegawa
5
Ono
Yamada
ALL USERS
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST UVWXYZ
DELETE
EXIT
name, repeat steps 2 to
4.
A password entry screen will appear.
ITIAL
Yamada
To exit, touch the [EXIT]
key in the screen of step
2.
Enter the 5-digit password with the
numeric keys.
3
ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.
NOTE
When a user name is changed, the change is not
updated to any previously saved data (files or
folders).
CANCEL
BCD
EFGHI
JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
After entering the password, the following screen
will appear.
[Deleting]
6 Touch the [DELETE] key.
DELETE
EXIT
USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE
No.001
Yamada
USER NAME
PASSWORD
INITIAL
Yamada
DELETE
EXIT
SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.
STORED TO:
ITIAL
Yamada
MAIN FOLDER
●To edit a user name, perform steps 4 and 5.
●To delete a user name, perform steps 6 and 7.
7 Touch the [YES] key.
You will return to the
screen of step 2. To
delete another user
name, repeat steps 2, 3,
5 and 6.
DELETE THE USER NAME?
Yamada
YES
NO
To exit, touch the [EXIT]
key in the screen of step
2.
7-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
■ Creating a custom folder
Up to 500 custom folders can be created. When no further folders can be created, delete unneeded folders (page
7-28) and then create a new folder. A password can be omitted when creating a folder. To create a custom folder,
follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24, touch the [CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION] key in step 3, and then follow
the steps below.
1 Touch the [FOLDER NAME] key.
5 Touch the [OK] key.
CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION
The lowest number that
has not yet been
programmed appears
No.001
EXIT
FOLDER NAME
OK
CANCEL
INIT
automatically in "No.".
Touch the number to
display a character entry
screen and enter a folder
USER NAME
10-KEY PAD.
name (maximum of 28 characters). See page 7-29
for the procedure for entering characters.
6 Touch the [USER NAME] key.
No.001
You will select a user
2 Touch the [INITIAL] key.
name that will be
associated with the
folder name you are
programming.
USER FOLDER 1
FOLDER NAME
USER1
PAS
INITIAL
CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION
A character entry screen
No.001
appears. Enter up to 10
USER NAME
USER FOLDER 1
FOLDER NAME
INITIAL
search characters. See
page 7-29 for the
procedure for entering
characters.
Selection of a user name
cannot be omitted.
P
USEE
The programmed user names appear.
Touch the desired user name. If you do not
wish to use any of the user names that
appear, touch the [ADD NEW] key to
program a new user name.
7
If you wish to set a password for the new
folder, touch the [PASSWORD] key.
3
CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION
A
password can be
No.001
omitted.
If you are omitting a
password, go to step 6.
CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION
USER FOLDER 1
FOLDER NAME
SELECT USER NAME.
Suzuki
OK
1/1
INITIAL
PASSWORD
Sasaki
Nakata
Yamada
Hasegawa
Ono
USER NAME
ADD NEW
7
ALL FOLDERS
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
When you touch a user name, a password entry
screen appears.
Set a password for the folder (enter a 5-
digit password with the numeric keys).
This will be the password
4
If you touched the [ADD NEW] key, program a user
programmed in step 1 will be selected as the folder
for the user.
for the folder name
CANCEL
entered in step 1.
ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.
Enter the 5-digit password of the selected
user name with the numeric keys.
8
ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.
CANCEL
BCD
EFGHI
JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
7-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
To exit, touch the [EXIT] key. To create
another folder, touch the [NEXT] key.
If you touched the [EXIT]
9 Touch the [OK] key.
10
key, you will return to the
OK
NEXT
EXIT
screen of step 3 on page
7-24. If you touched the
[NEXT] key, a new folder
1/1
ADD NEW
screen
will
appear.
SWORD
Repeat steps 1 to 10 to
create a new folder.
■ Editing/deleting a custom folder
To edit a previously created folder (change the folder name, initial, password, or user name), or to delete a folder,
follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24 and then follow the steps below.
When deleting a folder...
A folder that contains files cannot be deleted. Either move the files to a different folder or delete them before deleting the folder.
Touch the [AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM
FOLDER] key.
[Editing]
1
Touch the key of each item that you wish to
4
edit (edit as explained in steps 1 to 10 of
"Creating a custom folder" on page 7-27).
AMEND/DELETE USER NAME
DELETE
EXIT
CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE
AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER
No.001
REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.
USER FOLDER 1
FOLDER NAME
USER1
INITIAL
PASSWORD
Yamada
USER NAME
Touch the [FOLDER NAME] key that you
wish to edit or delete.
2
After editing the items and returning to the screen of
step 3, "REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED." will be
highlighted to the right of "No.".
EXIT
CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE
SELECT CUSTOM FOLDER TO AMEND/DELETE.
CUSTOM FOLDER 1
CUSTOM FOLDER 3
CUSTOM FOLDER 5
CUSTOM FOLDER 7
CUSTOM FOLDER 2
CUSTOM FOLDER 4
1/2
To stop using
a
password, touch the
[PASSWORD] key and then touch the [OK] key
without entering anything for the password. [-] will
appear and the password will be cancelled.
CUSTOM FOLDER 6
CUSTOM FOLDER 8
ALL FOLDERS
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
When you have finished editing the items,
touch the [EXIT] key.
5
If a password has been set for the folder, a
password entry screen will appear. Enter the
correct 5-digit password with the numeric keys.
To edit another folder, repeat steps 2 to 5.
[Deleting]
6 Touch the [DELETE] key.
3 Edit or delete the folder.
DELETE
EXIT
CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE
No.001
EXIT
DELETE
USER FOLDER 1
FOLDER NAME
USER1
*****
INITIAL
PASSWORD
ORD
Yamada
USER NAME
7 Touch the [YES] key.
●To edit the folder, perform steps 4 and 5.
●To delete the folder, perform steps 6 and 7.
●To exit, touch the [EXIT] key.
You will return to the
screen of step 2.
DELETE THE FOLDER?
To delete another folder,
repeat steps 2, 6, and 7.
To exit, touch the [EXIT]
key in the screen of step
2.
USER FOLDER 1
YES
NO
7-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
To enter or edit characters in setting screens such as auto dial key programming screens, follow the steps below.
Characters that can be entered are alphabetical characters, special characters, numbers, and symbols.
■ Entering alphabetical characters
(Example: Sharp äÄ)
1 Touch the [S] key.
5 Touch the [ ÃÄÂ/ãäâ] key.
Characters cannot be
entered beyond the " " mark.
Sharp
6 Touch the [ä] key.
To switch between upper case and lower case,
touch the [ABC abc] key. When ABC is
Sharp
highlighted, upper case letters are entered.
abc] key.
2 Touch the [ABC
S
To switch between upper case and lower case,
touch the [ÃÄÂ
ãäâ] key. When ãäâ is
highlighted, lower case letters are entered.
ãäâ] key.
7 Touch the [ÃÄÂ
Sharp ä
Touch the [h] key, [a] key, [r] key, and [p]
key.
3
Shar
8 Touch the [Ä] key.
Sharp ä
7
If you make a mistake, touch the
key to move
the cursor ( ) back one space and then enter the
correct character. You can also press the [AB/ab
12#$%] key during entry to enter a number or
symbol.
You can press the [ABC/abc] key during entry to
return to alphabetical character entry. You can
also enter numbers and symbols.
4 Touch the [SPACE] key.
9 When finished, touch the [OK] key.
Sharp
Sharp äÄ
The cursor ( ) moves forward and a space is
entered.
You will exit the character entry screen and return
to the programming screen. If you touch the
[CANCEL] key, you will return to the programming
screen without storing the entered characters.
7-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
■ Entering numbers and symbols
12#$%] key.
When you have finished entering
characters, touch the [OK] key.
1 Touch the [AB/ab
3
1&1
When the characters "12#$%" are highlighted,
number/symbol entry mode is selected.
You will exit the character entry screen and return
to the programming screen. If you touch the
[CANCEL] key, you will return to the programming
screen without storing the entered characters.
2 Enter the desired number or symbol.
Numbers and symbols that can be entered are as
follows:
NOTE
Screen 1/2
The following symbols cannot be used when
entering a file name or folder name.
\
?
>
/
!
"
*
;
|
:
,
<
&
#
Spaces and the following symbols may be replaced
by other characters.
Screen 2/2
$
.
%
=
}
'
(
[
)
]
+
^
-
`
@
~
{
Change screens by touching the
displayed in the screen. If you make a mistake,
touch the key to move the cursor ( ) back one
key or
key
space and then enter the correct character.
You can continue touching keys to enter
characters. You can also touch another character
type selection key ([ ÃÄÂ/ãäâ] key or [AB/ab
12#$%] key) to enter characters other than
numbers and symbols.
7-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
This section explains problems frequently encountered when using the document filing function. If you experience
any difficulty, refer to the following table. For information on general machine problems, printer problems, fax
problems, and network scanner problems, please see the troubleshooting sections of the appropriate manuals.
Problem
A saved file has Was the file called up and then printed by A file that is printed using the [PRINT AND
disappeared. touching the [PRINT AND DELETE THE DELETE THE DATA] key is automatically
Check
Cause and solution
DATA] key?
deleted after being printed. To print a file
without deleting it, use the [PRINT AND
SAVE THE DATA] key.
A file cannot be Is the file's attribute set to [PROTECT]?
deleted.
A file cannot be deleted when its attribute is
set to [PROTECT]. Change the attribute to
[SHARING] and then delete the file.
A
file's attribute Is the file in the main or custom folder?
A file in the Quick File folder cannot be set to
[CONFIDENTIAL]. Move the file to a
different folder or set it to [PROTECT].
cannot be set to
[CONFIDENTIAL].
A
file's attribute Is the file set to [CONFIDENTIAL]?
A file cannot be simultaneously set to
[CONFIDENTIAL] and [PROTECT]. If set to
cannot be changed
to [PROTECT].
[CONFIDENTIAL],
use
[PROPERTY
attribute to [PROTECT].
A name in the Quick Was the name programmed in the advanced If the name was programmed in the
File folder is cut off. transmission settings?
advanced transmission settings before the
file was saved in the Quick File folder, that
name will be used. However, if the name is
longer than the maximum name length of the
Quick File folder (30 characters), the excess
characters will be discarded.
Resolution settings Was the file saved at low resolution?
are not possible.
A saved file cannot be transmitted at a
resolution higher than the resolution at
which it was saved.
A file name cannot Have you entered prohibited characters in Certain characters (symbols) cannot be
be
changed.
stored
or the file name?
used in file names. See "ENTERING
CHARACTERS" (entering numbers and
symbols) on page 7-29.
A
custom folder Have you entered prohibited characters in Certain characters (symbols) cannot be
name cannot be the folder name?
stored or changed.
used in folder names. See "ENTERING
CHARACTERS" (entering numbers and
symbols) on page 7-29.
7
The printing speed The file was saved using one of the following When a file is saved using one of the
of a saved file is resolution settings:
resolutions setting at left, the printing speed
will be slower than when other resolution
settings are used.
●
slow.
200 x 200 dpi resolution.
●
STANDARD (200 x 100 dpi) or FINE (200
x 200 dpi)
Black dots appear Was the file saved at other than the following This problem can be alleviated by setting the
when a file that was resolutions?
resolution to 600x600dpi when saving a file
with scan save. The problem can be further
alleviated by selecting HALF TONE after
setting the resolution to 600x600dpi, as light
images will be printed lightly.
●
saved
document
with
the
filing
600x600dpi
600x600dpi and HALF TONE
●
function is printed.
To check the resolution of the saved file,
16.
7-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 8
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter contains useful information about the machine.
Page
SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................... 8-2
INDEX..................................................................................................... 8-4
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
Type
Console
Print system
Exposure system
Developer system
Paper feed system
Fusing system
Resolution
Electrophotographic system
OPC
Dry-type two-component magnetic brush development
4 trays and bypass tray
Heater roller
Scan: 600 x 600 dpi, output: 600 x 600 dpi
256 levels
Gradation
Originals
Sheets, bound documents
Maximum size: A3 or 11" x 17"
Copy paper
Copy sizes
Plain paper and special papers
Max. A3 or 11" x 17", min. A5R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, Postcard
Image loss: Max 8 mm or 21/64" (leading edge and trailing edge in total),
max. 8 mm or 21/64" (along all other edges in total)
Warm-up time
First-copy time
120 seconds or less
MX-M550U/MX-M620U/MX-M550N/MX-M620N
4.0 seconds or less*
MX-M700U/MX-M700N
3.5 seconds or less*
* When A4 (8-1/2 x 11") size paper is fed horizontally from tray1
"
Copy ratio
Variable: 25 to 400% in 1% increments, total 376 steps
Fixed presets: 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%, 200%
and 400% for AB system, 25%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 200% and 400%
for inch system.
Continuous copy
999 copies
Dimensions
(including automatic
document feeder)
728 mm (W) x 679 mm (D) x 1192 mm (H)
(28-43/64" (W) x 26-47/64" (D) x 46-15/16" (H))
Weight (main unit only)
Approx. 185 kg (Approx. 408 lbs.)
Overall dimensions
(When tray is extended)
1263 mm (W) x 679 mm (D) (49-23/32" (W) x 26-47/64"(D))
Required power supply
Power consumption
Operating conditions
Local voltage 10% (For power supply requirements, see the name plate located
on the back of the main unit.)
220 - 240V
120 - 127V
8A
16A
1.84 kW
1.8 kW
Temperature: 10ºC to 30ºC (50ºF to 86ºF)
Humidity: 20% to 85%
Automatic document feeder
Type
Two-side simultaneous scanning system
Original size
Capacity
A3 to A5 (11" x 17" to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
2
Maximum of 150 sheets (80 g/m (20 lbs.)) or total stack height of 19.5 mm
(49/64") or less.
Original exchange speed
Power supply
One-sided: 65 pages/min.
Two-sided: 76 sides/min.
Supplied from machine
Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
Continuous copying speed (when the offset function is not used)
MX-M550U/MX-M550N
MX-M620U/MX-M620N
MX-M700U/MX-M700N
Copy paper size
100% / Reduced / Enlarged
34 copies/min.
A3 (11" x 17")
30 copies/min.
35 copies/min.
55 copies/min.
40 copies/min.
55 copies/min.
40 copies/min.
40 copies/min.
39 copies/min.
45 copies/min.
70 copies/min.
48 copies/min.
70 copies/min.
48 copies/min.
48 copies/min.
B4 (8-1/2" x 14")
39 copies/min.
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
62 copies/min.
A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)
B5 (7-1/4" x 10-1/2")
B5R (7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R)
A5R (8-1/2" x 5-1/2"R)
45 copies/min.
62 copies/min.
45 copies/min.
45 copies/min.
Centre tray specifications
Output method
Face-down output
Maximum number
of sheets
2
(80g/m
(20lbs.) 250 sheets*
/recommended
paper)
Paper type
Plain paper and special paper
* The maximum number of pages that can be held varies
depending on ambient conditions in the installation
location, the type of paper, and the storage conditions of
the paper.
Acoustic Noise Emission (measurement according to ISO7779)
Sound power level LwA
Printing mode
7.3B
Standby mode
5.0B
Bystander positions
Operator position
58dB(A)
58dB(A)
34dB(A)
35dB(A)
Sound pressure level LpA
(reference)
* Noise emission when peripheral devices are installed
Emission Concentration (measurement according to RAL-UZ62: Edition Jan. 2002)
3
Ozone
Dust
0.02 mg/m or less
3
0.075 mg/m or less
8
3
Styrene
0.07 mg/m or less
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
[
] key................................................................. 1-13
Calling up and using a saved file.......................... 7-15
-Delete............................................................... 7-22
-Detail................................................................ 7-22
-Move ................................................................ 7-22
-Print.................................................................. 7-17
-Property change .............................................. 7-21
-Send................................................................. 7-20
-Card shot ..................................1-6, 5-2, 5-29, 7-12
Centre erase........................................................... 5-4
Centre tray.....................................................1-10, 4-9
[CENTRE TRAY] key.............................................. 3-6
Changing the paper size in paper tray .........2-3 to 2-6
Clear all key...................................................1-13, 7-4
Clear key .......................................................1-13, 7-4
Clock .................................................................... 2-18
Confidential ............................................................ 7-3
Contents.......................................................0-5 to 0-6
Continuous copying speed..................................... 8-3
[COPY] key........................................................... 1-13
Cover of the duplex unit........................................ 1-11
Covers/inserts ........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-12
Creating a custom folder ...................................... 7-27
Custom folder...........................7-3, 7-24, 7-27 to 7-28
[#/P] key ............................................................... 1-13
■ Numerics
1-sided copy.................................................. 4-7, 4-11
1-sided copy-Automatic document feeder.............. 4-7
1-sided copy-Document glass.............................. 4-11
256MB expansion memory board ........................ 1-12
2in1 ............................................................. 5-24, 7-12
2-sided copy.........................................1-3, 4-10, 4-13
■ A
Acceptable originals............................................... 4-2
Account number................................................... 1-18
Additional fax memory.......................................... 1-12
Address control .................................................... 2-18
Adjusting the exposure.................................. 1-3, 4-14
Administrator settings........................................... 2-18
Alarm display........................................................ 3-16
All custom setting list............................................ 2-20
Application communication module............. 1-12, 3-19
Application integration module............................. 1-12
Attributes................................................................ 7-3
Auditing mode ...................................................... 1-18
Auto image ........................................................... 4-15
Auto power shut-off mode ...................................... 1-9
Automatic copy image rotation............................... 4-4
Automatic document feeder .................1-10, 2-31, 4-2
Automatic document feeder .........................................
-1-sided copies.................................................... 4-7
-Acceptable originals........................................... 4-2
-Automatic two-sided copying ........................... 4-10
-Misfeed original................................................ 2-31
-Setting originals ................................................. 4-3
-User maintenance.............................................. 6-2
Automatic exposure adjustment........................... 4-14
Automatic selection .............................................. 4-15
Automatic two-sided copying
■ D
Data security kit.................................................... 1-12
Default settings..................................................... 2-20
[DETAIL] key......................................................... 1-16
Display contrast.................................................... 2-20
Display switching keys.......................................... 1-16
Disposal of hole punch scrap ............................... 3-10
Document feeder tray......................................4-2, 4-3
Document filing control......................................... 2-18
Document filing function..................................1-8, 7-1
Document filing user / folder list ........................... 2-20
[DOCUMENT FILING] key ............................1-13, 7-4
Document glass
-1-sided copies.................................................. 4-11
-Automatic two-sided copying ........................... 4-13
-Placing originals................................................. 4-3
-User maintenance.............................................. 6-2
Document transfer cover ...............................2-31, 4-3
Dual page copy ........................................1-4, 5-2, 5-5
DUAL PAGE SCAN .............................................. 7-12
Duplex unit ........................................................... 1-11
-Automatic document feeder ............................. 4-10
-Document glass ............................................... 4-13
Automatic two-sided printing ................................ 2-13
Auxiliary tray......................................................... 2-10
■ B
B/W reverse............................................1-6, 5-2, 5-31
Barcode font kit .................................................... 1-12
Binding change .................................................... 4-13
Book copy ..............................................1-5, 5-2, 5-26
Book original .......................................................... 5-5
Bypass tray.........................................1-10, 2-28, 4-20
■ E
Editing and deleting
-Custom folder................................................... 7-28
-User names...................................................... 7-26
Energy saving features........................................... 1-9
Energy Star guidelines ........................................... 1-9
Enlargement......................................................... 4-15
Entering characters..................................7-29 to 7-30
Erase...............................................1-4, 5-2, 5-4, 7-12
■ C
[C] key ........................................................... 1-13, 7-4
[CA] key......................................................... 1-13, 7-4
Call for service ..................................................... 2-32
[CALL] key............................................................ 1-16
Calling up and using a file.................................... 7-13
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Examples of covers and inserts ............... 5-17 to 5-22
-Covers.................................................. 5-18 to 5-21
-Inserts.............................................................. 5-22
External account module............................. 1-12, 3-20
Loading paper ........................................................ 2-2
-bypass tray....................................................... 2-10
-tray 1 - tray 2 ...................................................... 2-2
-tray 3 .................................................................. 2-5
-tray 5 ........................................................2-7 to 2-9
LOGOUT.............................................................. 1-13
[LOGOUT] key.............................................1-13, 1-18
Lower cover............................................................ 3-2
■ F
Facsimile expansion kit ........................................ 1-12
Fax data receive/forward...................................... 2-18
[FAX JOB] key...................................................... 1-16
Features................................................................. 1-3
[FILE FOLDER] key................................................ 7-5
Finisher ......................................................... 1-10, 3-2
[FINISHER TRAY] key............................................ 3-6
Front cover .................................................... 1-10, 3-2
Fusing unit..........................................1-11, 2-23, 2-24
■ M
Main features................................................1-3 to 1-8
Main folder.............................................................. 7-3
Main power switch.......................................1-11, 1-17
Main screen............................................................ 5-2
Manual exposure adjustment ............................... 4-14
Manual selection .................................................. 4-16
Margin Shift ..............................................1-4, 5-2, 5-3
Meaning of "R" ....................................................... 1-2
Mirror image ...........................................1-6, 5-2, 5-31
Misfeed...................... 2-23 to 2-31, 3-11 to 3-12, 3-18
Misfeed in the paper feed area.................2-26 to 2-30
Misfeed original .................................................... 2-31
Misfeed removal ................................................... 2-23
-Tray 1 - tray 2 ................................................... 2-26
-Tray 3 - tray 4 ................................................... 2-27
-Automatic document feeder ............................. 2-31
-Bypass tray ...................................................... 2-28
-Finisher/saddle stitch finisher........................... 3-11
-Inserter............................................................. 3-17
-Transport area, fusing area, and exit area ....... 2-24
-Tray 5 ...................................................2-29 to 2-30
-Duplex unit ....................................................... 2-25
Mode select key ................................................... 1-15
Mode select keys...........................................1-13, 7-4
More information on plain paper........................... 2-13
More information on special media ...................... 2-13
Multi shot................................................1-5, 5-3, 5-24
■ G
General procedure for using special functions....... 5-2
Greyed out............................................................ 1-14
Group .......................................................1-3, 3-4, 4-9
[GROUP] key.......................................................... 3-6
■ H
[HDD STATUS] key................................................. 7-5
Heavy paper................................................ 2-12, 2-13
Highlighted ........................................................... 1-14
Hole punching ................................................. 1-8, 3-5
■ I
Icon ......................................................1-14, 5-17, 7-5
[IMAGE SEND] key .............................................. 1-13
Information ........................................................... 2-23
Inserter.................................................1-8, 1-10, 3-14
Installation requirements........................................ 0-2
Interior.................................................................. 1-11
Internet fax expansion kit ..................................... 1-12
[INTERNET-FAX] key ........................................... 1-16
Interrupting a copy run .................................. 1-7, 5-46
■ N
Network expansion kit .......................................... 1-12
Network scanner expansion kit ............................ 1-12
Non-standard sizes .....................2-12, 2-14, 2-17, 4-5
Number of pages printed...................................... 1-18
number of pages transmitted (scanned)............... 1-18
Numeric keys.................................................1-13, 7-4
■ J
Job build..........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-8, 7-12
Job programs ....................................1-6, 5-44 to 5-45
-Calling up......................................................... 5-45
-Deleting............................................................ 5-45
-Storing ............................................................. 5-44
Job status screen................................................. 1-15
[JOB STATUS] key ............................................... 1-13
8
■ O
Offset...............................................................1-7, 3-4
[OFFSET] key......................................................... 3-6
Operation panel...........................................1-10, 1-13
-Document filing function..................................... 7-4
-Inserter............................................................. 3-15
Original guides ....................................................... 4-3
Original orientation..........................................3-5, 4-4
Original size .............................................4-2, 4-5, 4-6
Output .............................................3-4, 3-6, 4-9, 4-12
Output tray.....................................................1-10, 4-9
■ K
Keyboard select.................................................... 2-20
■ L
Labels................................................................... 2-12
Landscape.............................................................. 1-2
Large capacity tray (AR-LC6)...............1-10, 2-7, 2-29
Large capacity tray (AR-LC7)...............1-10, 2-8, 2-30
Left cover of paper drawer ................................... 1-11
Left side cover release ......................................... 1-11
List print................................................................ 2-20
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Selecting a function.............................................. 1-14
Selecting the exposure level................................. 4-14
Selecting the exposure mode............................... 4-14
Selecting the output tray......................................... 4-9
Sender control...................................................... 2-18
Sender control list ................................................ 2-20
Sending address list............................................. 2-20
Setting the paper size...............................2-14 to 2-17
Setting the paper type ..............................2-14 to 2-16
Sharing................................................................... 7-3
Sharp OSA........................................................... 3-19
Sort...........................................................1-3, 3-4, 4-9
[SORT] key............................................................. 3-6
Special modes (Copier operation).......................... 5-2
Special modes (Document filing function)............ 7-12
Special paper ...........................................2-12 to 2-13
Special papers ..................................................... 4-20
Specifications...............................................8-2 to 8-3
-Finisher/saddle stitch finisher...................3-2 to 3-3
-Inserter............................................................. 3-14
-Large capacity tray (AR-LC6)............................. 2-7
-Large capacity tray (AR-LC7)............................. 2-8
-Punch module.................................................... 3-3
Specifications of paper trays ................................ 2-12
Standard sizes...............................................1-2, 2-13
Standard sizes in both the AB and inch systems ... 1-2
Staple cartridge...................................................... 3-3
Staple cartridge replacement .......................3-7 to 3-8
Staple jam removal.....................................3-9 to 3-10
Staple sort.......................................................1-7, 3-4
[STAPLE SORT] key............................................... 3-6
[STAPLE] key ....................................................... 3-15
Stapler compiler ..................................................... 3-2
Stapling positions................................................... 3-4
[START] key.................................................1-13, 3-15
[STOP/DELETE] key ............................................ 1-16
Storage of supplies............................................... 2-22
System settings...........................................2-18, 7-24
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key............................1-13, 7-4
■ P
Pamphlet copy..........................................1-4, 5-2, 5-6
Paper curled......................................................... 2-33
Paper tray settings ...................................... 2-14, 2-20
Part names
-Exterior ............................................................ 1-10
-Finisher and the saddle stitch finisher................ 3-2
-Inserter............................................................. 3-14
-Interior.............................................................. 1-11
-Operation panel ...............................1-13, 3-15, 7-4
-Trays................................................................... 2-2
Password................................................................ 7-8
Peripheral devices....................................... 1-10, 1-12
Photo.................................................................... 4-14
Photoconductive drum ......................................... 1-11
Placing originals..................................................... 4-3
Plain paper............................................... 2-12 to 2-13
Portrait.................................................................... 1-2
Postcards ........................................2-10 to 2-11, 4-20
Power .......................................................... 1-17, 2-32
Power switch ............................................... 1-11, 1-17
Preheat mode......................................................... 1-9
Preset copy ratios................................................. 4-16
[PRINT JOB] key.................................................. 1-16
PRINT mode indicators........................................ 1-13
Printer condition ................................................... 2-18
Printer test page................................................... 2-20
[PRIORITY] key.................................................... 1-16
Proper storage ..................................................... 2-22
Protect.................................................................... 7-3
PS3 expansion kit ................................................ 1-12
Punch module ............................................... 1-11, 3-2
[PUNCH] key................................................. 3-6, 3-15
■ Q
Quick File folder ..................................................... 7-3
[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key ................................... 7-5
■ R
[READ-END] key.................................4-12, 5-8 to 5-9
Reduction............................................................. 4-15
Reduction/Enlargement................................. 1-4, 4-15
Replacing the toner cartridges............................. 2-21
Right side cover.................................................... 1-11
Rotation copying .................................................... 4-4
■ T
Tab copy.................................................1-6, 5-2, 5-26
Tabbed paper............2-6, 2-10, 2-12 to 2-13, 3-15, 4-20, 5-12, 5-27
Tandem copy..........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-10
Text....................................................................... 4-14
Text/photo............................................................. 4-14
The machine does not operate......................2-32, 6-3
Toner cartridge ............................................1-11, 2-21
Top cover................................................................ 3-2
Total count............................................................ 2-20
Total number of originals ........................................ 4-2
Touch panel...................................1-13, 1-14, 7-4, 7-5
Transparency film .............. 2-6, 2-12, 2-13, 4-20, 5-23
Transparency inserts..............................1-5, 5-2, 5-23
Tray................................................................1-10, 3-2
Tray 1..........................................1-10, 2-2 to 2-4, 2-26
Tray 2..........................................1-10, 2-2 to 2-4, 2-26
Tray 3....................................................1-10, 2-5, 2-27
Tray 4....................................................1-10, 2-6, 2-27
Tray 5................................... 1-10, 2-7, 2-8, 2-29, 2-30
■ S
Saddle stitch.................................................... 1-8, 3-5
Saddle stitch finisher..................................... 1-10, 3-2
Saddle stitch tray.................................................... 3-2
[SADDLE STITCH] key .......................................... 3-6
Saving a document image file.................... 7-6 to 7-12
-Filing ........................................................ 7-7 to 7-8
-Print jobs............................................................ 7-9
-Quick file ............................................................ 7-6
-Scan save ............................................ 7-10 to 7-11
[SCAN TO] key..................................................... 1-15
[SCAN TO HDD] key.............................................. 7-5
[SEARCH] key........................................................ 7-5
Searching for a file ................................... 7-13 to 7-14
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Troubleshooting
-Copier operation ................................................ 6-3
-Document filing function................................... 7-31
-Finisher/saddle stitch finisher........................... 3-13
-General information ............................. 2-32 to 2-34
-Inserter............................................................. 3-18
Types and sizes of paper ......................... 2-12 to 2-13
Types and sizes of paper that can be used.......... 2-12
■ U
Upper cover of large capacity tray........................ 1-11
User maintenance.................................................. 6-2
User name................................................ 7-24 to 7-26
■ W
Warming up.......................................................... 2-32
■ X
XY Zoom ....................................................... 1-4, 4-18
■ Z
Zoom.................................................................... 4-16
8
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣
Required in IEC-950 (EN 60 950) - Europe
• The equipment should be installed near an accessible socket outlet for easy disconnection.
Required in Appendix ZB of BS 7002 (En 60 950) — United Kingdom
MAINS PLUG WIRING INSTRUCTIONS
The mains lead of this equipment is already fitted with a mains plug which is either a non-rewireable
(moulded) or a rewireable type. Should the fuse need to be replaced, a BSI or ASTA approved fuse
to BS1362 marked
be used.
or
and of the same rating as the one removed from the plug must
Always refit the fuse cover after replacing the fuse on the moulded plug. Never use the plug without
the fuse cover fitted.
In the unlikely event of the socket outlet in your home not being compatible with the plug supplied
either cut-off the moulded plug (if this type is fitted) or remove by undoing the screws if a rewireable
plug is fitted and fit an appropriate type observing the wiring code below.
DANGER: The fuse should be removed from the cut-off plug and the plug destroyed immediately
and disposed of in a safe manner. Under no circumstances should the cut-off plug be inserted
elsewhere into a 13A socket outlet as a serious electric shock may occur.
To fit an appropriate plug to the mains lead, follow the instructions below:
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: Earth
BLUE:
BROWN:
Neutral
Live
As the colours of the wires in this mains lead may not correspond with coloured markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug
which is marked with the letter E, or by the safety earth symbol Å@, or coloured green or green-
and-yellow.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter
N or coloured black.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter L or coloured red.
If you have any doubt, consult a qualified electrician.
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.
➢
➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣
➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢
➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣
SHARP ELECTRONICS (Europe) GmbH
Sonninstraße 3, D-20097 Hamburg
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRINTED IN FRANCE
TINSE3587GHZZ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|